This is a modern-English version of Palmistry for All, originally written by Cheiro. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.



The Author Best regards, Cheiro

PALMISTRY
FOR ALL

CONTAINING NEW INFORMATION
ON THE STUDY OF THE
HAND NEVER BEFORE
PUBLISHED

CONTAINING NEW INFORMATION
ON THE STUDY OF THE
HAND NEVER BEFORE
PUBLISHED

BY

CHEIRO

WITH A PREFACE TO AMERICAN READERS
AND
WITH UPWARDS OF SIXTY ILLUSTRATIONS

WITH A PREFACE FOR AMERICAN READERS
AND
WITH OVER SIXTY ILLUSTRATIONS

G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS
NEW YORK                       LONDON

G.P. Putnam's Sons
New York London

COPYRIGHT, 1916
BY
G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS

COPYRIGHT, 1916
BY
G.P. PUTNAM'S SONS


Published, May, 1916

Published, May 1916

Twenty-second Impression

22nd Impression

Made in the United States of America

Made in the USA


PREFACE

TO THE AMERICAN EDITION

There is no country in the world where the "study of character" is more indulged in than in the United States of America. During my many visits there I could not help remarking how even the "hardest headed" business men used any form of this study that they could get hold of to help them in their business dealings with other men and also in endeavouring to ascertain the character of their clerks and employees.

There’s no country in the world that indulges in the "study of character" more than the United States. During my many visits there, I noticed how even the most “hard-headed” businesspeople used any form of this study they could find to assist them in their business interactions with others, as well as in trying to understand the character of their clerks and employees.

In looking over the records of my career I find that in the course of my visits to America I gave private lessons to the heads of two hundred and seventy business establishments in New York, one hundred and thirty-five in Boston, and three hundred and forty-two in Chicago.

In reviewing the records of my career, I've noticed that during my visits to America, I provided private lessons to the leaders of two hundred seventy business establishments in New York, one hundred thirty-five in Boston, and three hundred forty-two in Chicago.

All these men were large employers of labour and what they principally wanted was, to have some help beyond that of their own judgment in dealing with those with whom they came in contact in the regular course of their business careers. In no other country did I find the same interest taken in the study of character from a practical standpoint.

All these men were major employers and what they mainly wanted was some assistance beyond their own judgment in dealing with the people they interacted with during their business careers. I didn't find the same level of interest in studying character from a practical perspective in any other country.

It is for this reason that I write a special Preface for this Edition, believing as I do that my American[Pg iv] readers will appreciate the added information I may be able to give regarding the obtaining by a mere glance at a hand a quick grasp of the leading characteristics of the persons with whom they are thrown into contact, or for whatever reason they choose to make use of this study.

It’s for this reason that I'm writing a special Preface for this Edition, because I believe my American[Pg iv] readers will value the additional information I can provide on how to quickly understand the main traits of the people they encounter, whether it’s for personal reasons or just to delve into this study.

Everyone knows that "the face can wear a mask," that a person may be a good actor and put on a certain expression that may deceive even the best judgment.

Everyone knows that "the face can wear a mask," that a person can be a good actor and put on an expression that can fool even the best judgment.

But hands cannot change as the result of a mere effort to please; the character they express is the real nature of the individual—the true character that has been formed by heredity or that has grown up with the person by long years of habit.

But hands can't change just because someone wants to please; the character they show is the true nature of the individual—the real character shaped by genetics or developed over many years of habit.

The characteristics alluded to below are those which may be easily observed and which are aids to a rapid judgment of character and which I have never before been able to give to the public in such a concise way.

The traits mentioned below are those that can be easily noticed and help quickly assess someone's character, and I’ve never been able to present them to the public in such a clear manner before.

The more elaborate details concerning the ultimate success of the person one is talking to, their more intimate character and their future development will be found in their proper place, in the subsequent chapters.

The more detailed information about the ultimate success of the person you’re talking to, their deeper character, and their future growth will be found in the right section, in the following chapters.

RULES FOR RAPID OBSERVATION

The Fingers

The Fingers

Observe the fingers. If they look short and stumpy in proportion to the rest of the palm—one may be sure that the individual to whom they belong is of an animal nature, possessing coarse instincts, devoid of real intellectuality, and belonging to the lower order of humanity.[Pg v]

Look at the fingers. If they seem short and thick in comparison to the rest of the palm, you can be sure that the person they belong to has animal-like traits, rough instincts, lacks true intelligence, and is part of the lower tier of humanity.[Pg v]

If the fingers and the palm appear equal in length, the owner belongs to a more cultured race. He has inherited from a more intellectual line of ancestors and for all work requiring intelligence and a higher mentality he or she could be depended on, whereas the first-mentioned type could not—no matter how well he might talk or advocate his own superiority.

If the fingers and palm look like they’re the same length, the person is from a more cultured background. They’ve inherited traits from a more intellectual lineage, and for any tasks that need intelligence and a higher level of thinking, they can be relied upon, unlike the first type, who cannot—regardless of how well they might talk or promote their own superiority.

If the fingers look unusually long and thin, and in this way out of proportion to the palm, the man or woman will err on the side of too much ideality and refinement and is not suited to business or work requiring "level headedness" and practicality. It would be useless, for example, to put such a person in charge of work-people or over work-rooms. His ideality and refinement would be thrown away in such positions, and even with the best will in the world he would be completely out of harmony with his surroundings.

If someone has fingers that appear unusually long and thin, making them seem disproportionate to the palm, that person is likely to lean too much toward idealism and refinement, which makes them unsuited for business or practical tasks that require a grounded approach. For instance, it would be pointless to assign such a person to manage workers or oversee workspaces. Their idealism and refinement would not be valued in those roles, and even with the best intentions, they would feel completely out of sync with their environment.

Such a man, however, could be depended upon in all positions requiring personal mental work, research, science, literature, philosophy, educational work or, in fact, anything relating to the higher qualities of the mind.

Such a man, however, could be relied upon in any role that required personal mental effort, research, science, literature, philosophy, education, or basically anything related to the higher functions of the mind.

If his fingers, in addition to their length, were also knotty or jointed (joints much pronounced), he could be depended on to a still greater extent for all work requiring great thoughtfulness, detail, and concentration of mind.

If his fingers, besides being long, were also knotted or jointed (with very noticeable joints), he could be relied upon even more for any work that needed a lot of thought, detail, and focus.

If, on the other hand, these long fingers were smooth jointed, he would, while having the same desire for ideality and for everything intellectual, be impulsive and inspirational, would lack a sense of detail and a love for detail in his own work, would be visionary, artistic, emotional. Such a person would be suited[Pg vi] to artistic work, such as painting, making designs, models, etc., but could not be trusted to perform anything requiring detail, research or science, and would be utterly useless in any position where discipline or control of others were required.

If, on the other hand, these long fingers were smoothly jointed, he would, while still having the same desire for perfection and for everything intellectual, be more impulsive and inspiring, lacking attention to detail and a love for precision in his own work. He would be visionary, artistic, and emotional. Such a person would be suited[Pg vi] for artistic work, like painting, designing, making models, etc., but wouldn’t be reliable for anything that requires detail, research, or science, and would be completely ineffective in any role that needed discipline or management of others.

THE FINGERS CONSIDERED SEPARATELY

Let us now observe the fingers separately from the rest of the hand.

Let’s now look at the fingers apart from the rest of the hand.

The first finger is considered as the Dictator, the Lawgiver, the finger of Ambition, the Indicator, the Pointer, etc.

The first finger is seen as the Dictator, the Lawmaker, the finger of Ambition, the Indicator, the Pointer, and so on.

If this finger is unusually long and nearly equals the second, all these tendencies are extremely pronounced.

If this finger is unusually long and almost the same length as the second one, all these tendencies are very noticeable.

Therefore, if your employee has this finger long, you can safely entrust him with control over, and charge of others. You will be amazed how well he or she will make rules and regulations and see that they are obeyed; but beware, Mr. Employer, lest your first finger is short in proportion as that of your employee is long, for, if such be the case, you too will have "to toe the line" and you may find yourself in a very disagreeable position.

Therefore, if your employee has a long finger, you can confidently trust them with managing and overseeing others. You’ll be surprised at how well they create rules and ensure they are followed; but be careful, Mr. Employer, if your own finger is short compared to your employee's long finger, because in that case, you’ll also have to "toe the line," and you might find yourself in an uncomfortable situation.

But let me give you a further warning: Should this man or woman have a first finger that is long and crooked, you will assuredly find out to your cost that the personal ambitions of such an individual are "crooked." Such an employee would be perfectly unscrupulous in finding out your secrets and getting you into his power.

But let me give you another warning: If this man or woman has a long and crooked index finger, you will definitely find out the hard way that their personal ambitions are "twisted." Such an employee would be completely ruthless in uncovering your secrets and gaining control over you.

If the second finger is straight and well shaped, its owner will be very serious, a little inclined to melancholy,[Pg vii] but will pay due regard to whatever responsibilities with which he may be entrusted, but again beware if this finger is crooked. In this case the owner would be, however, more subject to what may be called "a crooked fate" than wilfully "wrong." Such people are, as a rule, the children of strange circumstances over which they seem to have no control. They are continually getting themselves into trouble and into false positions, but, I must admit, more by a strange fatality of things than by their own wilful actions. Nevertheless, such infelicities might be very unpleasant for their employer, especially if he has more heart than brains.

If the second finger is straight and well-shaped, the person will be very serious, a bit prone to sadness,[Pg vii] but will take seriously whatever responsibilities they are given. However, be cautious if this finger is crooked. In this case, the person may be more affected by what could be described as "a crooked fate" rather than being intentionally "wrong." Generally, these individuals are the product of unusual circumstances that seem beyond their control. They often find themselves in trouble and difficult situations, but I have to admit, it's usually due to an odd twist of fate rather than their own deliberate choices. Still, these challenges can be quite troublesome for their employer, especially if he has more compassion than common sense.

The third finger, if extremely long and straight, indicates an extraordinary desire for glory, celebrity, publicity and the like; and although this might be an extremely good quality in the case of an actor, preacher, politician or public man, it may be most undesirable if such a person is to occupy the position of a private secretary, or the confidential clerk to some family lawyer.

The third finger, if very long and straight, shows an intense desire for fame, recognition, and attention; while this might be a great trait for an actor, preacher, politician, or public figure, it could be quite undesirable if that person is supposed to be a private secretary or a confidential assistant to a family lawyer.

If this finger is crooked as well as very long, all the above qualities will be intensified and exaggerated. The love of spending money and fondness for show will also be more marked, the gambling tendencies very pronounced. No position involving the handling of money, should be entrusted to the possessor of such a finger.

If this finger is bent and really long, all the qualities mentioned above will be stronger and more pronounced. Their love for spending money and desire to show off will be more obvious, and their gambling habits will be very noticeable. No job that involves handling money should be given to someone with this kind of finger.

The fourth, or little finger, if long (passing the nail joint of the third) is indicative of power of speech and subtlety in choice of language—the saying "to twist a person round one's little finger" originated from this very sign. Such people have a marvellous gift of speech, eloquence and flow of language, valuable[Pg viii] gifts, of course, for orators and public persons, but not desirable qualities in a wife if a man is fond of sleep.

The fourth finger, or little finger, when long (extending past the nail joint of the third finger) suggests good communication skills and a knack for choosing words carefully. The expression "to twist someone around one's little finger" comes from this characteristic. People with this feature have a remarkable ability to speak, are eloquent, and have a natural flow to their language, which are valuable talents for speakers and public figures. However, these traits may not be desirable in a wife if a man enjoys his sleep.

A short "little finger" denotes the reverse of the above. Such persons find the greatest difficulty in expressing what they want to say, but they can write better than speak and should be encouraged to do so.

A short "little finger" indicates the opposite of the above. People like this struggle a lot to express what they want to say, but they can write better than they can speak and should be encouraged to write.

These individuals have, however, not much power over others and the shorter the "little finger" is, the more timid and sensitive they are in the presence of strangers. If this finger is crooked, then these weaknesses are all the more emphasised, but if formed crooked and long the power of eloquence is also crooked. Such people will tell any "fairy tale" to suit their purpose—they are natural born liars and the position of President of the Ananias Club is their rightful inheritance.

These individuals, however, don't have much influence over others, and the shorter their "little finger," the more timid and sensitive they are around strangers. If this finger is crooked, their weaknesses are even more pronounced, but if it’s both crooked and long, their persuasive ability is also flawed. Such people will spin any "fairy tale" to suit their interests—they are natural-born liars, and the title of President of the Ananias Club is their rightful claim.

The first and third fingers absolutely of equal length is the best sign of an equally balanced mind, but such a sign is rather rare to find.

The first and third fingers being exactly the same length is the best indicator of an equally balanced mind, but this trait is quite rare to come by.

When the fingers are very supple in the joints and turn backwards or outwards from the palm, it is an indication of a quick wit and clever brain; but such persons lack continuity of purpose. They have no "hold," as it were, on any one thing.

When the fingers are very flexible in the joints and bend back or outward from the palm, it shows a quick wit and clever mind; however, these people lack persistence. They don’t really have a strong grip on anything in particular.

Fingers slightly curved inwards towards the palm, denote persons slow to grasp an idea, or a subject, but such people have retentive memories and "hold" or grip, as it were, any one thing they may take up.

Fingers slightly curved inward toward the palm indicate people who are slow to understand an idea or a subject. However, these individuals have strong memories and really "hold onto" anything they take on.

CHARACTER SHOWN BY THE THUMB

The thumb is in itself more expressive of character than any other member of the hand. It was D'Arpentigny[Pg ix] who wrote "the thumb individualises the man."

The thumb is more revealing of personality than any other part of the hand. It was D'Arpentigny[Pg ix] who said, "the thumb individualizes the person."

Medical science has proved that there is such a thing as a "thumb centre" in the brain and any pressure or disease in that part of the brain shows its effect in the thumb.

Medical science has shown that there is a "thumb center" in the brain, and any pressure or disease in that area affects the thumb.

A large well-made thumb is the outward and visible sign of a strong-willed, determined person, be he man or woman.

A strong, well-formed thumb is a clear and visible sign of a strong-willed, determined person, whether they are male or female.

The longer the thumb, the more the power of will rules the actions; the shorter the thumb, the more brute force and obstinacy sways the nature.

The longer the thumb, the more willpower influences actions; the shorter the thumb, the more physical strength and stubbornness dominate behavior.

The shorter and more thick-set the nail phalange is, giving the appearance of a club, the more ungovernable is the person in his or her temper. Such people have no control over themselves and under the least opposition will fly into a blind rage of fury. This curious formation has been called the "Murderer's Thumb" because so many who have committed murder in a mad fit of passion have been found with this curious formation.

The shorter and thicker the finger bone is, resembling a club, the more uncontrollable the person is in their temper. These individuals lack self-control and will easily fly into a blind rage at the slightest challenge. This unusual shape has been termed the "Murderer's Thumb" because many who have committed murder in a fit of passion have been found with this peculiar trait.

An employee with this class of thumb should never be given any position of authority over others, for he could not curb his ungovernable temper. He would also be absolutely unbalanced in his jealousy, and no woman who has the ambition to live to the usual "threescore-years-and-ten" should risk marriage to a man with one of these thumbs. But as "love is blind" it is useless, I know, to give advice in such a case.

An employee with this type of thumb should never be put in a position of authority over others, as he wouldn't be able to control his uncontrollable temper. He would also be completely irrational in his jealousy, and no woman who wants to live to the typical "seventy years" should take the chance of marrying a man with one of these thumbs. But since "love is blind," I know it's pointless to give advice in such situations.

The first joint or nail phalange of the thumb, when long and thin, denotes the opposite of the above characteristics. In such cases the person has the most absolute control over his temper, his will power is[Pg x] also strong but quick and unobtrusive, and in a firm, determined way people with such a thumb manage others and bend those around them to their purpose.

The first joint or nail phalange of the thumb, when long and thin, shows the opposite of the characteristics mentioned above. In these cases, the person has complete control over their temper; their willpower is[Pg x] also strong but quick and subtle. In a firm, determined manner, people with such a thumb can manage others and influence those around them to achieve their goals.

The second joint, if delicately shaped, almost "waist like," indicates tact, diplomacy, and gentleness, also subtlety in argument; but if this part of the thumb be full looking or equal in size to that of the nail phalange, it denotes the person who cares nothing for tact but who, on all occasions, will speak his mind plainly, and with brutal frankness.

The second joint, if it's shaped delicately, almost "waist-like," shows tact, diplomacy, and gentleness, as well as subtlety in arguments. However, if this part of the thumb appears full or is about the same size as the nail phalange, it indicates a person who doesn't care about tact and will always express their thoughts directly and with brutal honesty.

When the thumb looks as if it were "tied in" close to the hand, the person is timid, easily frightened by both people and circumstances, narrow-minded in his views, and miserly in his habits. It is a well-established fact that the thumbs of all misers are "tied in" and cramped-looking. It is perhaps this very fear of things and people that in the end makes them misers with their gold.

When the thumb looks like it’s “tied in” close to the hand, the person is shy, easily scared by both people and situations, narrow-minded in their views, and stingy in their habits. It’s a well-known fact that the thumbs of all stingy people look “tied in” and cramped. It’s probably this very fear of things and people that ultimately turns them into misers with their money.

One need never waste one's time asking a person with one of these cramped-looking thumbs to do a favour, and may God help the business man or woman who ever gets into such a person's clutches!

One should never waste time asking someone with one of those cramped-looking thumbs for a favor, and may God help the businessman or businesswoman who ever falls into such a person's hands!

A thumb with the nail joint supple (bending backwards or as it is also called "double jointed") indicates a character the exact opposite of that associated with the "tied in" thumb. Possessors of such a thumb are generous, adaptable to others, extravagant, and impetuous in their actions and decisions. They promise things quickly and are more often heard to say "Yes" than "No"; but if they have time for reflection, they very often go back on their promises.

A thumb with a flexible nail joint (bending backwards, or what's often called "double-jointed") shows a personality that is completely different from those with a "tied in" thumb. People with this kind of thumb are generous, adaptable, extravagant, and impulsive in their actions and decisions. They tend to make promises quickly and are more likely to say "Yes" than "No"; however, if they take a moment to think about it, they often retract their promises.

Individuals having a "stiff-jointed" thumb, on the contrary, cannot easily adapt themselves to others. They are distant and more reserved with[Pg xi] strangers. When asked to do a thing, they generally first say "No," but on reflection or when reasoned with, they often give in to the other and generally regret having done so. It is useless to oppose such people—if one cannot lead them, it is no use attempting to force them against their will.

People with a "stiff-jointed" thumb, on the other hand, find it hard to adjust to others. They tend to be distant and more reserved with[Pg xi] strangers. When asked to do something, they usually respond with "No" at first, but after thinking it over or being persuaded, they often relent and usually regret doing so. It's pointless to push against such individuals—if you can't guide them, there's no point in trying to force them to act against their will.

This type has more self-control than the type of people with the "supple jointed" formation, and is not so generous or extravagant. Individuals of this group, however, make more reliable friends, so their friendship, though difficult to obtain, is generally worth having.

This type has more self-control than those with a "supple jointed" formation and isn’t as generous or extravagant. However, people in this group tend to be more dependable friends, so while their friendship can be hard to gain, it’s usually worth it.

A thumb standing very far out from the hand (almost at right angles to the palm) is not a good sign for ordinary success. Such people go to extremes in everything they do and are generally fanatics in religion, social reform, or whatever line of thought occupies their attention.

A thumb that sticks out a lot from the hand (almost at a right angle to the palm) isn't a good indicator for typical success. These individuals tend to be extreme in everything they pursue and are usually fanatics about religion, social reform, or whatever ideas capture their focus.

HANDS, HARD AND SOFT

Even in the simple act of shaking hands, one can form conclusions about character.

Even in the simple act of shaking hands, you can draw conclusions about someone's character.

Beware of any man or woman whose hand seems to slip from yours when you grasp theirs in greeting. Such persons are deceptive and treacherous. They may smile at you with their lips, but instinctively they regard you as their prey and will only use you for their own object.

Beware of anyone whose hand seems to pull away from yours when you greet them. These individuals are deceitful and untrustworthy. They may smile at you, but deep down, they see you as nothing more than a target and will only use you for their own purposes.

A soft, fat hand is the indication of an indolent and more or less lazy person.

A soft, chubby hand suggests that someone is lazy and somewhat idle.

A firm hand is the sign of an energetic, reliable nature.

A strong hand shows that someone is energetic and dependable.

A very thin hand denotes a restless energetic disposition,[Pg xii] but one that is given to worry, and fretting and is generally discontented.

A very thin hand shows a restless, energetic nature,[Pg xii] but one that tends to worry, fret, and is usually unhappy.

A thin hand that feels listless in one's grasp denotes a weak constitution that has only sufficient energy to live.

A thin hand that feels limp in your grip indicates a weak body that has just enough energy to survive.

A cold, clammy hand is also a sign of poor health, but generally that of a very sensitive and nervous person.

A cold, clammy hand is also a sign of poor health, but usually that of a very sensitive and anxious person.

A person who keeps his hands closed while talking, is distrustful in his nature, has little self-reliance and can seldom be relied on by others.

A person who keeps their hands closed while talking is naturally distrustful, lacks self-confidence, and is rarely someone others can depend on.

A man or woman who gives a good firm grasp of the hand, is self-confident, energetic, and generally reliable.

A person who gives a strong handshake is self-assured, lively, and usually dependable.

When all the fingers (especially if the fingers be long) are seen always clinging, sticking, as it were, or folding over one another it denotes very doubtful qualities in the nature of their possessor and a decided tendency towards thieving and general lack of moral principal.

When all the fingers (especially if they're long) are seen constantly clinging, sticking, or overlapping one another, it suggests very questionable traits in the person who has them and a definite tendency toward stealing and a general lack of moral principles.

Remember that the hands are the immediate servants or instruments of the brain. There are more motive and sensory nerves from the brain to the hand than to any other portion of the body and, whether sleeping or waking, they continually and unconsciously reflect the thought and character of the mind or soul of the individual.

Remember that the hands are the direct servants or tools of the brain. There are more motor and sensory nerves connecting the brain to the hands than to any other part of the body, and whether we're awake or asleep, they constantly and unconsciously show the thoughts and character of a person's mind or soul.

It will, then, be seen from these observations that without looking at the lines of the hand, one may be able to obtain certain details of character that are more trustworthy than those given by the face, and that these rules, if followed, should be of the greatest assistance and value to people in all walks of life.

It can be seen from these observations that even without examining the lines on the hand, you can gather certain details about someone's character that are more reliable than those inferred from their face. If these guidelines are followed, they can be incredibly helpful and valuable to people from all backgrounds.

Many of these observations are further amplified[Pg xiii] in subsequent chapters of this work. There is not a single one of these rules that has not been proved by me in my long professional career, and knowing that they will bear the strictest inquiry and observation, it gives me pleasure now to offer them to the readers of the American Edition of Palmistry for All.

Many of these observations are further expanded upon[Pg xiii] in the following chapters of this book. Every one of these rules has been validated through my lengthy professional experience, and knowing that they can withstand the closest scrutiny, I am pleased to present them to the readers of the American Edition of Palmistry for All.

Cheiro.

Scent.

London.

London.


INTRODUCTION

It was on July 21, 1894, that I had the honour of meeting Lord Kitchener and getting the autographed impression of his right hand, which I now publish for the first time as frontispiece to this volume. The day I had this interview, Lord Kitchener, or, as he was then, Major-General Kitchener, was at the War Office, and to take this impression had to use the paper on his table, and, strangely enough, the imprint of the War Office may be seen at the top of the second finger—in itself perhaps a premonition that he would one day be the controlling force of that great department.

It was on July 21, 1894, that I had the honor of meeting Lord Kitchener and getting the autographed impression of his right hand, which I now publish for the first time as the frontispiece to this volume. On the day of our meeting, Lord Kitchener, or as he was then known, Major-General Kitchener, was at the War Office, and to take this impression, he had to use the paper on his desk. Interestingly, the imprint of the War Office can be seen at the top of the second finger—perhaps a sign that he would one day be the leading force of that important department.

Lord Kitchener was at that moment Sirdar of the Egyptian Army. He had returned to England to tender his resignation on account of some hostile criticism about "the Abbas affair," and so I took the opportunity of his being in England to ask him to allow me to add his hand to my collection, which even then included some of the most famous men and women of the day.

Lord Kitchener was at that moment the leader of the Egyptian Army. He had come back to England to resign due to some negative criticism regarding "the Abbas affair," and so I took the chance of his being in England to ask him if I could add his signature to my collection, which even then included some of the most renowned men and women of the time.

As Mr. T.P. O'Connor, in writing recently of Lord Kitchener, said: "One of his greatest qualities, at once useful and charming, is his accessibility. Anybody who has anything to say to him can approach him; anybody who has anything to teach him will find a ready and grateful learner."[Pg xvi]

As Mr. T.P. O'Connor recently wrote about Lord Kitchener: "One of his greatest qualities, which is both practical and appealing, is his approachability. Anyone who wants to speak with him can do so; anyone who has something to teach him will find a willing and appreciative student."[Pg xvi]

My experience can indeed bear out the truth of this clear judgment of one of the leading traits in Lord Kitchener's character. That very year, 1894, was a notable one in his life; his strong-willed action over the Abbas affair was completely vindicated; he was made a K.C.M.G., and returned to Egypt with more power than ever.

My experience can definitely confirm the accuracy of this clear observation regarding one of the key aspects of Lord Kitchener's character. That same year, 1894, was significant in his life; his assertive handling of the Abbas situation was fully justified; he was appointed a K.C.M.G., and returned to Egypt with more authority than ever.

Once in his presence he put me completely at my ease, and in a few moments he appeared to be deeply interested in observing the difference between the lines in his own clearly-marked palm and those in dozens of other impressions that I put before him.

Once I was with him, he made me feel completely comfortable, and in no time he seemed really interested in comparing the lines on his clearly-defined palm with those from dozens of other handprints that I showed him.

He was then almost forty-four years of age, and I remember well how I explained the still higher positions and responsibilities that his path of Destiny mapped out before him. The heaviest and greatest of all would, I told him, be undertaken in his sixty-fourth year (1914), but how little either of us thought then that in that year the most terrible war of the century would have broken out.

He was almost forty-four years old, and I clearly remember how I explained the even greater positions and responsibilities that his path of Destiny had in store for him. I told him that the heaviest and most significant of all would come in his sixty-fourth year (1914), but how little we both realized at that time that the most devastating war of the century would start that year.

Believing, as I do, in the Law of Periodicity playing as great a rôle in the lives of individuals as it does in nations, it is strange to notice that the same radix numbers that governed Lord Kitchener's career when he was planning out the Egyptian campaign, which resulted in his great victories of Atbara and Omdurman in 1896 and 1897, are exactly the same for him in 1914-1915, and 1916 gives again the same radix number that in 1898 saw him receive a vote of thanks from both Houses of Parliament, and a gift of £30,000 from the State.

I believe that the Law of Periodicity influences individuals just as much as it does nations. It's interesting to see that the same core numbers that shaped Lord Kitchener's career during his planning of the Egyptian campaign, which led to his significant victories at Atbara and Omdurman in 1896 and 1897, are exactly the same for him in 1914-1915. Furthermore, 1916 reflects the same core number that, in 1898, resulted in him receiving a vote of thanks from both Houses of Parliament, along with a £30,000 gift from the State.

From the standpoint of those interested in this strange study of hands, the accompanying impression of Lord Kitchener's cannot help but be regarded as of[Pg xvii] great importance. In it, the rules of Palmistry that I have given in the following pages are borne out in all their details.

From the perspective of those intrigued by this unusual examination of hands, the related impression of Lord Kitchener must be considered of[Pg xvii] significant importance. In it, the guidelines of Palmistry that I present in the following pages are confirmed in all their details.

Returning to the impression of this remarkable hand; even in shape alone one may read by the rules of this science the following clearly-marked characteristics:

Returning to the impression of this remarkable hand; even in shape alone, one can clearly identify the following distinct characteristics by the principles of this science:

Length of fingers—intellectuality (page 134), strong determination and will-power (chapter on the Thumb, page 127), mentality and firm determination of purpose (see Line of Head, page 17).

Length of fingers—intelligence (page 134), strong determination and willpower (chapter on the Thumb, page 127), mentality and strong sense of purpose (see Line of Head, page 17).

The remarkable Line of Fate running up the centre of the hand and turning towards the first finger, denotes ambition and domination over others (page 52).

The significant Line of Fate that runs down the middle of the hand and curves toward the index finger indicates ambition and the desire to control others (page 52).

The Line of Success and Fame, starting on the hand from the Line of Life and ascending to the base of the third finger, exactly coincides with the period in Lord Kitchener's career when he began to find recognition and success (page 63).

The Line of Success and Fame, starting on the hand from the Line of Life and rising to the base of the third finger, perfectly aligns with the time in Lord Kitchener's career when he started to gain recognition and success (page 63).

As in my larger work on this subject I published Gladstone's hand as a remarkable illustration of the truth that may be found in this study, so in this present work with the same confidence I give this illustration of Lord Kitchener's as another proof of character indicated in the shape and lines of the hand, and as it has been said so often that "Character is Destiny," so it is surely not illogical to point out that in following the rules laid down by this study one may obtain a clear idea of the destiny that the Character, Will, and Individuality trace out in advance—tracks, as it were, stretching far out into the distant future for the engine of purpose and achievement to find already laid and ready to be used at the "appointed time."[Pg xviii]

Just like in my larger work on this topic where I showcased Gladstone's hand as an impressive example of the insights found in this study, I confidently present this illustration of Lord Kitchener's hand as further evidence of character revealed through the shape and lines of the hand. It has often been said that "Character is Destiny," so it makes sense to suggest that by following the guidelines of this study, one can gain a clear understanding of the destiny that Character, Will, and Individuality outline in advance—like tracks extending far into the future for the engine of purpose and achievement to find already laid out and ready to be used at the "appointed time."[Pg xviii]

In conclusion, as I have now completely retired from all professional work, I may be allowed to point out that I am not publishing this book with the idea of seeking clients. I have no desire but to see this strange study taken up as a useful and practical means of obtaining an exact judgment of the character, qualities, and hidden tendencies that might otherwise be ignored.

In conclusion, now that I've fully retired from all professional work, I want to make it clear that I'm not releasing this book to attract clients. I only hope to see this unique study embraced as a helpful and practical way to gain an accurate understanding of people's character, qualities, and hidden tendencies that might otherwise be overlooked.

I think that if all parents knew at least something of Palmistry, the vast majority of children would be more usefully trained and their proper tendencies developed.

I believe that if all parents understood even a little bit about Palmistry, most children would receive better guidance and their natural abilities would be nurtured.

It is often too late when a child discovers—and most probably by accident—some tendency or talent that had never been suspected by its parents.

It’s often too late when a child finds out—usually by chance—about a talent or ability that their parents never suspected.

It is no wonder that so few persons find their true vocations in the world, when it is remembered the random, haphazard way in which children are brought up—educated for the most part in some scholastic mill that grinds down all to the same dead level of mediocrity, and then turns them into the Army, the Church, or into trade.

It's no surprise that so few people discover their true passions in life when you consider the random and careless way children are raised—mostly educated in a schooling system that flattens everyone to the same uninspired level of mediocrity, and then funnels them into the military, the church, or into various occupations.

If, on the contrary, all these studies that teach the understanding of character were more encouraged, parents would have less excuse for the supreme ignorance they now show as to the real nature of those children who hold them responsible for their entry into the battlefield of existence.

If, on the other hand, more emphasis were placed on studies that promote understanding of character, parents would have less justification for the extreme ignorance they currently display regarding the true nature of the children they blame for their struggle in the challenges of life.

These same parents would lift up their voices in righteous indignation if soldiers were sent into battle untrained, without their proper equipment, and yet these same parents have never, in the whole course of their lives, made the simplest study of any one of those many subjects by which they could in knowing[Pg xix] the nature of their child, have strengthened weak points in the fortress of character, or by developing some talent or gift, doubly armed him for his entry into the battle of life.

These same parents would raise their voices in justified anger if soldiers were sent into battle untrained and without proper gear, yet these same parents have never, throughout their entire lives, taken the time to study any of the many topics that could help them understand[Pg xix] their child's nature, strengthen weak points in their character, or develop a talent or gift that would better prepare them for the challenges of life.

It is from this standpoint that I earnestly hope this study of hands may some day be taken up. It was from this standpoint that I interested such men as Gladstone, Professor Max Muller, of Oxford, Lord Russell, when he was Lord Chief Justice, King Edward VII., and many others too numerous to mention; and lastly, it is from the same standpoint that I have now written this book, which under the title of Palmistry for All, will, I hope, appeal to all classes, and cause such an interest in the Study of Character that, instead of such an art being left in the hands of a few, it will, on the contrary, become universally used for the benefit of all.

From this perspective, I truly hope that this study of hands will be explored one day. It's from this viewpoint that I captured the interest of notable figures like Gladstone, Professor Max Muller from Oxford, Lord Russell when he was Chief Justice, King Edward VII, and many others who are too numerous to mention. Lastly, it's from the same viewpoint that I've written this book, which is titled Palmistry for All. I hope it resonates with people across all walks of life and sparks an interest in the Study of Character so that instead of this art being confined to a few, it will be widely embraced for everyone's benefit.

Cheiro

Scent

Note.—Cheiro retired from all professional work some time ago, and the public is therefore warned against persons pretending that they are the real "Cheiro," and endeavouring to pass themselves off as the author of his well-known works.[Pg xxi]

Note.—Cheiro has stepped away from all professional activities for a while now, so the public is advised to be cautious of individuals claiming to be the real "Cheiro" and trying to present themselves as the author of his famous works.[Pg xxi]


CONTENTS

PAGE
Introductioniii
Introductionxv
PART I
PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY
CHAPTER
I.A Short Overview of the History of Hand Studies from the Past to Today1
II.The Line of Head or Indicators of Mindset8
The Line of Head and its Variations10
The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life16
The Line of Head separated from the Line of Life19
The Line of Head and its Secondary Signs22
Changes in the Line of Head26
Crosses and Squares in connection with the Line of Head30
Double Lines of Head31
The Line of Head on the Seven Types of Hands33
III.The Line of Life and Its Variations36
IV.The Line of Mars or Inner Life Line44
V.The Line of Destiny or Fate47
From the Line of Life50
From the Wrist50
From the Mount of the Moon51
[Pg xxii]
From the Middle of the Palm55
Influence Lines to the Line of Fate57
Double Lines of Fate57
VI.The Line of the Sun or Success61
From the Line of Life63
From the Line of Fate63
From the Plain of Mars63
From the Mount of the Moon63
From the Line of Head63
From the Line of Heart63
VII.The Line of Heart shows your affectionate and emotional nature.67
VIII.Marriage Signs73
The Marriage Line:
At the Base of the Fourth Finger73
Influence Lines to the Fate Line77
Influence Lines on Venus79
IX.Lines indicating Children, their Gender, and Other Related Matters81
X.The Line of Health or Hepatica83
XI.The Belt of Venus88
The Ring of Saturn90
The Bracelets91
XII.The Intuition Line92
The Via Lasciva93
XIII.The Mystic Cross95
The Ring of Solomon96
XIV.Travel, Journeys, and Mishaps97
XV.The Island, the Circle, the Spot, and the Grill101
[Pg xxiii]
XVI.The Star, the Cross, the Square104
XVII.Various Types of Lines and Right and Left Hands107
XVIII.The Great Triangle and the Quadrangle110
XIX.How to Determine the Time and Dates of Key Events in Life112
PART II
CHEIROGNOMY—OR THE SHAPES OF THE HANDS AND FINGERS
I.The Study of Hand Shape117
The 7 Types of Hands:
The Elementary119
The Square119
The Spatulate121
The Philosophic122
The Conic124
The Psychic125
The Mixed126
II.The Thumb127
The Supple Jointed128
The Firm Jointed128
The First, Second and Third Phalange131
III.The Fingers133
Length of Fingers to one another133
Smooth Jointed135
Knotty Jointed135
IV.Nails136
Long Nails136
Short Nails137
Flat Nails138
Their Indications of Disease139
[Pg xxiv]
V.The Peaks of the Hand140
VI.Mars Mountain144
VII.Jupiter's Mountain150
VIII.Saturn's Mountain154
IX.Sun Mountain158
X.Mercury Mountain162
XI.The Moon Mountain168
XII.The Venus Mount173
XIII.Advice to Students: The Best Ways to Make Casts or Take Impressions of Hands178

ILLUSTRATIONS

PAGE
CheiroFrontispiece
The Lines of the Hand1
Lord Kitchener's Hand2
PLATE
I.The Three Principal Positions for the Commencement of the Line of Head11
II.The Line of Head joined to the Line of Life and its Terminations18
III.The Line of Head separated from the Line of Life20
IV.Islands on the Line of Head24
V.More Variations of the Line of Head27
VI.The Line of Head and Line of Heart running together29
VII.Double Lines of Head, also Crosses and Squares32
VIII.The Line of Life and Sections of Influences from the Mounts37
IX.The Line of Life and its Variations40
X.The Line of Life and Line of Mars45
XI.The Line of Destiny and its Modifications51
XII.The Line of Destiny and its Variations53
XIII.The Line of Destiny and its Modifications56
XIV.The Line of Destiny, Islands, and other Signs59
XV.The Line of Sun and its Modifications62
[Pg xxvi]
XVI.The Line of Heart and its Variations68
XVII.The Line of Marriage74
XVIII.Marriage Lines and Influence Lines which further help in denoting Marriage78
XIX.The Line of Health84
XX.The Girdle of Venus. The Ring of Saturn. The Bracelets. The Line of Intuition. The Via Lasciva89
XXI.Travels, Voyages, Accidents, and Descending Lines from the Mounts99
XXII.The Island, the Circle, the Spot, the Grille, the Star, and the Square102
XXIII.Minor Marks and Signs105
XXIV.Minor Marks and Signs108
XXV.The Great Triangle and the Quadrangle111
XXVI.Times and Dates of Principal Events113
CHEIROGNOMY
ILLUSTRATIONS
I.The Elementary Hand120
The Square or Useful Hand120
The Spatulate Hand120
The Philosophic Hand120
II.The Conic or Artistic Hand123
The Psychic Hand123
The Mixed Hand123
[Pg xxvii]
III.Thumbs:
The Clubbed Thumb129
The Supple Jointed Thumb129
The Firm Jointed Thumb129
The Waist-Like Thumb129
The Straight Thumb129
The Elementary Thumb129
IV.The Fingers:
The Smooth134
The Square134
The Knotty134
V.The Nails:
Delicacy of Throat137
Chest and Bronchial137
Spinal Weakness137
Weak Action of the Heart137
Paralysis137
VI.The Mounts of the Hand:
The Mount of Venus141
The Mount of Mars141
The Mount of Jupiter141
The Mount of Saturn141
The Mount of the Sun141
The Mount of Mercury141
The Mount of the Moon141
THE LINES OF THE HAND. The lines on your palm.

Palmistry for All

PART I—PALMISTRY OR CHEIROMANCY

CHAPTER I

A BRIEF RÉSUMÉ OF THE HISTORY OF THE STUDY OF HANDS THROUGH THE CENTURIES TO THE PRESENT DAY

The success I had during the twenty-five years in which I was connected with this study was, I believe, chiefly owing to the fact that although my principal study was the lines and formation of hands, yet I did not confine myself alone to that particular page in the book of Nature. I endeavoured to study every phase of thought that can throw light on human life; consequently the very ridges of the skin, the hair found on the hands, all were used as a detective would use a clue to accumulate evidence. I found people were sceptical of such a study only because they had not the subject presented to them in a logical manner.

The success I had over the twenty-five years I spent researching this topic was, I think, mainly due to the fact that while my main focus was analyzing the lines and shapes of hands, I didn’t limit myself to just that part of the book of Nature. I sought to explore every aspect of thought that could shed light on human life; as a result, I used even the fine lines of the skin and the hair on the hands as clues, similar to how a detective gathers evidence. I discovered that people were skeptical about this field of study mainly because it hadn’t been presented to them in a clear and logical way.

There are hundreds of facts connected with the hand that people have rarely, if ever, heard of, and I[Pg 2] think it will not be out of place if I touch on them here. For instance, in regard to what are known as the corpuscles, Meissner, in 1853, proved that these little molecular substances were distributed in a peculiar manner in the hand itself. He found that in the tips of the fingers they were 108 to the square line, with 400 papillæ; that they gave forth certain distinct crepitations, or vibrations, and that in the red lines of the hand they were most numerous and, strange to say, were found in straight individual rows in the lines of the palm. Experiments were made as to these vibrations, and it was proved that, after a little study, one could distinctly detect and recognise the crepitations in relation to each individual. They increased or decreased in every phase of health, thought, or excitement, and were extinct the moment death had mastered its victim. About twenty years later, experiments were made with a man in Paris, who had an abnormally acute sense of sound (Nature's compensation for want of sight, as he had been born blind). In a very short time this man could detect the slightest change or irregularity in these crepitations, and through the changes was able to tell with wonderful accuracy about how old a person was, and how near they were to illness, and even death.

There are tons of facts about the hand that most people have rarely, if ever, heard of, and I[Pg 2] think it’s worthwhile to mention them here. For example, when it comes to what's known as corpuscles, Meissner discovered in 1853 that these tiny molecular substances were uniquely distributed in the hand itself. He found that at the tips of the fingers, there were 108 per square line, with 400 papillae; they emitted distinct crepitations or vibrations, and interestingly enough, they were most concentrated in the red lines of the hand, arranged in straight individual rows along the palm’s lines. Experiments on these vibrations showed that, with a bit of practice, one could clearly detect and recognize the crepitations in relation to each individual. They varied with each phase of health, thought, or excitement, and completely disappeared the moment death had taken its toll. About twenty years later, tests were conducted with a man in Paris who had an unusually keen sense of sound (Nature’s way of compensating for his lack of sight, as he had been born blind). In no time, he could sense the slightest change or irregularity in these crepitations, and from those changes, he could determine with astonishing accuracy a person's age, how close they were to illness, and even death.

The study of these corpuscles was also taken up by Sir Charles Bell, who, in 1874, demonstrated that each corpuscle contained the end of a nerve fibre, and was in immediate connection with the brain. This great specialist also demonstrated that every portion of the brain was in touch with the nerves of the hand and more particularly with the corpuscles found in the tips of the fingers and the lines of the hand.

The study of these corpuscles was also taken up by Sir Charles Bell, who, in 1874, showed that each corpuscle contained the end of a nerve fiber and was directly connected to the brain. This prominent specialist also proved that every part of the brain was linked to the nerves of the hand, particularly to the corpuscles found in the tips of the fingers and the lines of the hand.

LORD KITCHENER'S HAND. LORD KITCHENER'S HAND.

The detection of criminals by taking impressions[Pg 3] of the tips of the fingers and by thumb marks is now used by the police of almost every country, and thousands of criminals have been tracked down and identified by this means.

The identification of criminals through fingerprint impressions[Pg 3] and thumbprints is now used by police in nearly every country, and thousands of criminals have been caught and identified using this method.

To-day, at Scotland Yard, is to be seen almost an entire library now devoted to books on this side of the subject and to the collections that the police have made, and yet, in my short time, I remember how the idea was scoffed at when Monsieur Bertillon and the French police first commenced the detection of criminals by this method. If the ignorant prejudice against a complete study of the hand were overcome, the police would be greatly assisted by studying the lines of the palm, and acquiring a knowledge of what these lines mean, especially as regards mentality and the inclination of the brain in one direction or another.

Today, at Scotland Yard, there's almost a whole library dedicated to books on this subject and the collections the police have gathered. Yet, I remember how the idea was mocked when Monsieur Bertillon and the French police first started using this method to catch criminals. If we could overcome the ignorance and bias against fully studying the hand, the police would greatly benefit from examining the lines on the palm and understanding what these lines signify, particularly in terms of mentality and the tendencies of the mind.

It is a well-known fact that, even if the skin be burned off the hands or removed by an acid, in a short time the lines will reappear exactly as they were before, and the same happens to the ridges or "spirals" in the skin of the inside tips of the fingers and thumb.

It’s a well-known fact that even if the skin is burned off the hands or removed by acid, after a short time the lines will show up exactly as they were before, and the same goes for the ridges or "spirals" on the inside tips of the fingers and thumb.

The scientific use of such a study could also be made invaluable in foreseeing tendencies towards insanity, etc.

The scientific application of this study could also be incredibly valuable in predicting trends toward mental illness, etc.

Sir Thomas Browne, in his Religio Medici, after referring to Physiognomy, says:

Sir Thomas Browne, in his Religio Medici, after mentioning physiognomy, says:

"Now there are besides these characters in our faces certain mystical figures in our hands, which I dare not call mere dashes, strokes à la volée or at random, because delineated by a pencil that never works in vain, and hereof I take more particular notice because I carry that in mine own hand which I could never read nor discover in another."

"Now, along with these features on our faces, there are certain mystical shapes in our hands that I can't simply call random lines or strokes because they're drawn by a pencil that never works without purpose. I pay special attention to this because I have one in my own hand that I could never read or find in someone else's."

But prejudice is a hard thing to combat, and, in consequence, a study which could render untold aid to humanity has been neglected in modern times. Yet it cannot be denied that this strange study was practised and followed by some of the greatest teachers and students of other civilisations.

But prejudice is tough to fight against, and as a result, a study that could provide immense help to humanity has been overlooked in modern times. Still, it's undeniable that this unusual study was practiced and pursued by some of the greatest teachers and learners from other civilizations.

Whether or no these ancient philosophers were more enlightened than we are has long been a question of dispute, but the one point and the most important one which has been admitted is, that in those days the greatest study of mankind was man. It is, therefore, reasonable to suppose that their conclusions are more likely to be correct than those of an age like our own—famous chiefly for its implements of destruction, its warships, its dynamite, and its cannon.

Whether these ancient philosophers were more enlightened than we are has been debated for a long time, but one thing that’s been agreed upon is that back then, the main focus of study was humanity itself. So, it makes sense to believe that their conclusions are probably more accurate than those of our era—known mainly for its tools of destruction, warships, dynamite, and cannons.

This study of hands can be traced back to the very earliest, most enlightened forms of civilisation. It has been practised by the greatest minds in all those civilisations, minds that have left their mental philosophies and their monuments for us to marvel at. India, China, Persia, Egypt, Rome—all in their study of mankind have placed the greatest store in their study of the hand.

This study of hands goes back to the earliest and most advanced forms of civilization. The greatest thinkers from these cultures have engaged in it, leaving behind their ideas and remarkable monuments for us to admire. India, China, Persia, Egypt, and Rome—all have valued the study of the hand highly in their exploration of humanity.

During my stay in India, I was permitted by some Brahmans (descendants of the Joshi Caste, famous from time immemorial for their knowledge in occult subjects) with whom it was my good fortune to become intimately acquainted, to examine and make extracts from an extraordinary book on this subject which they regarded as almost sacred, and which belonged to the great past of the now despised Hindustan.

During my time in India, I was allowed by some Brahmins (descendants of the Joshi Caste, known for their deep knowledge of occult subjects) with whom I was fortunate to become close, to study and take notes from an incredible book on this topic that they considered almost sacred and that belonged to the great history of the now-maligned Hindustan.

As the wisdom of the Hindus spread far and wide across the earth, so the theories and ideas about this[Pg 5] study spread and were practised in other countries. Similar to the way in which religion suits itself to the conditions of the country in which it is propagated, so has it divided itself into various systems. It is, however, to the days of the Greek civilisation that we owe the present clear and lucid form of the study. The Greek civilisation has, in many ways, been considered the highest and most intellectual in the world, and here it is that Palmistry or Cheiromancy (from the Greek χεíρ, the hand) grew and found favour in the eyes of those who have given us laws and philosophies that we employ to-day and whose works are taught in all our leading colleges and schools.

As the wisdom of the Hindus spread across the globe, the theories and ideas about this[Pg 5] study also disseminated and were practiced in other countries. Just like how religions adapt to the cultural context of the places they are introduced, this study has also split into different systems. However, we owe the current clear and coherent form of the study to the era of Greek civilization. Greek civilization is often regarded as one of the highest and most intellectual in the world, where Palmistry or Cheiromancy (from the Greek χεíρ, meaning hand) developed and gained appreciation among those who have given us laws and philosophies that we still use today, and whose works are taught in all our top colleges and schools.

It is a well-known and undisputed fact that the philosopher Anaxagoras not only taught but practised this study. We also find that Hispanus discovered on an altar dedicated to Hermes a book on Cheiromancy, written in gold letters, which he sent as a present to Alexander the Great, as "a study worthy of the attention of an elevated and enquiring mind." Instead of it being followed by the "weak-minded," we find, on the contrary, that it numbered amongst its disciples such men of learning as Aristotle, Pliny, Paracelsus, Cardamis, Albertus Magnus, the Emperor Augustus, and many others of note.

It's a well-known fact that the philosopher Anaxagoras not only taught but also practiced this study. We also see that Hispanus found a book on palmistry, written in gold letters, on an altar dedicated to Hermes, which he sent as a gift to Alexander the Great, calling it "a study worthy of an elevated and curious mind." Rather than being embraced by the "weak-minded," it attracted notable scholars like Aristotle, Pliny, Paracelsus, Cardamis, Albertus Magnus, Emperor Augustus, and many other distinguished figures.

This brings us down to the period when the power of the Church was beginning to be felt outside the domain and jurisdiction of religion. It is said that the early Fathers were jealous of the influence of this old-world science. Whether this be true or not, we find that it was bitterly denounced and persecuted by the early Church. It has always been, that the history of any dominant creed or sect is the history of opposition to knowledge, unless that knowledge[Pg 6] come through it. This study, therefore, the offspring of "pagans and heathens," was not even given a trial. It was denounced as sorcery and witchcraft; the devil was conjured up as the father of all such students, and the result was that through this bitter persecution, the study was outlawed, and fell into the hands of vagrants, tramps, and gipsies. In spite of this persecution it is interesting and significant to notice that almost the first book ever printed was a work on Palmistry, Die Kunst Ciromantia, printed in Augsburg, in the year 1475.

This brings us to a time when the Church's influence was starting to extend beyond just religious matters. It’s said that the early Church leaders were envious of this ancient science's impact. Whether that's true or not, we see that the early Church fiercely condemned and persecuted it. The history of any dominant belief system is often a history of opposing knowledge, unless that knowledge comes through it. This field of study, seen as the creation of "pagans and heathens," wasn’t even given a proper chance. It was labeled as sorcery and witchcraft; the devil was portrayed as the source of all such scholars, leading to the situation where, due to this intense persecution, the study was outlawed and relegated to the hands of outcasts, drifters, and gypsies. Despite this persecution, it's interesting and notable that one of the first books ever printed was about Palmistry, Die Kunst Ciromantia, printed in Augsburg in 1475.

In examining this subject it will be found that in the study of mankind it came to be recognised that, as there was a natural position on the face for the nose, eyes, lips, etc., so also on the hand was there a natural position for what is known as the Line of Head, Line of Life, and so on. If these were found in some unnatural position they would equally be the indications of unnatural tendencies. It doubtless took years of study to name these lines and marks, but it must be remembered that this curious study is more ancient than any other in the world.

In exploring this topic, it's clear that the study of humanity has shown that just like there's a natural placement for the nose, eyes, lips, and so on, there’s also a natural placement for what are called the Line of Head, Line of Life, and others on the hand. If these lines appear in unnatural positions, they would similarly signal unnatural tendencies. It likely took years of observation to identify these lines and markings, but we should remember that this intriguing field of study is older than any other in the world.

In the original Hebrew of the Book of Job (chap. xxxvii., ver. 7), we find these significant words: "God caused signs or seals on the hands of all the sons of men, that the sons of men might know their works."

In the original Hebrew of the Book of Job (chap. xxxvii., ver. 7), we find these significant words: "God caused signs or seals on the hands of all the sons of men, that the sons of men might know their works."

As the student of anatomy can build up the entire system from the examination of a single bone, so may a person by a careful study of an important member of the body such as the hand, apart from anything superstitious or even mystical, build up the entire action of the system and trace every effect back to its cause.

Just as an anatomy student can reconstruct the whole body from studying a single bone, a person can, through a close examination of a key part of the body like the hand, without any superstition or mystical beliefs, understand the entire function of the system and trace every effect back to its cause.

To-day the science of the present is coming to the[Pg 7] rescue of the so-called superstition of the past. All over the world scientists are little by little sweeping aside prejudice and beginning to study occult questions. Perhaps the "whys and wherefores" of such things may one of these days be as easily explained as are those wireless waves of electricity that carry messages from land to land.[Pg 8]

Today, modern science is stepping in to challenge the so-called superstitions of the past. Around the world, scientists are gradually overcoming biases and starting to explore supernatural questions. Maybe one day, the "whys and wherefores" of these phenomena will be just as easy to explain as the wireless waves of electricity that transmit messages across countries.[Pg 7][Pg 8]


CHAPTER II

THE LINE OF HEAD OR THE INDICATIONS OF THE MENTALITY

The object of the following chapters is to give clear and unmistakable instruction on the lines and markings of the hands, both from the student's standpoint and from that of the general reader. This is not usually the course adopted in books printed on this subject which have to appeal to a general public.

The purpose of the following chapters is to provide clear and straightforward guidance on the lines and markings of the hands, addressing both students and general readers. This approach is not typically taken in books on this topic that aim to attract a broad audience.

During my twenty-five years' professional experience in England, America, and other countries, I have carefully noted down the questions that are not answered in books published on this subject. I have also recorded what are the difficulties that arise in the minds of those students who meet this, that, or the other mark or line and search in vain for some explanation as to its meanings. I may add that there is not a single point on which I give information that has not been proved by me from probably thousands of cases that have come before me during my own professional experience.

During my twenty-five years of professional experience in England, America, and other countries, I have carefully noted the questions that aren't answered in the books published on this subject. I've also recorded the difficulties that arise for students who encounter various marks or lines and search in vain for explanations of their meanings. I can also say that there isn’t a single point where I provide information that hasn't been backed up by probably thousands of cases I've encountered during my career.

As regards illustrations, I have endeavoured to make these of the simplest and clearest kind possible. I have every confidence that if they are carefully studied, no student can fail to grasp this subject in[Pg 9] a masterful manner, and that whoever acts upon the advice I give in these pages, cannot fail to become successful as an interpreter of this study.

When it comes to illustrations, I've tried to make them as simple and clear as possible. I'm confident that if you study them closely, no student will struggle to master this subject in[Pg 9] a powerful way, and anyone who follows the advice I offer in these pages will succeed as an interpreter of this study.

In all my work I regard the Line of Head (page 11) or the Line of Mentality as the most important sign that can be found in the hand.

In all my work, I consider the Line of Head (page 11) or the Line of Mentality to be the most important sign in the hand.

A Line of Head is like the needle in the compass, without a true knowledge of which it is impossible to grasp the "direction of the subject." I have seen more mistakes caused by a lack of grasp of this point than by anything else.

A Line of Head is like the needle in a compass; without a true understanding of it, it's impossible to grasp the "direction of the subject." I've seen more mistakes caused by not understanding this point than by anything else.

I have seen, for example, many students make the mistake of paying great attention to what looked like a good Line of Sun or Success, and, at the same time, not noticing a weak, badly formed Line of Head, which contradicted the promise of success given by the various lines. If, on the other hand, the student had first noticed the Line of Head, he would have been able to tell the subject that the promise of success was not backed up by the intelligence or the mentality.

I have seen, for example, many students make the mistake of focusing a lot on what seemed like a promising Line of Sun or Success while completely overlooking a weak, poorly formed Line of Head, which contradicted the success that the other lines suggested. If, instead, the student had noticed the Line of Head first, they would have been able to tell the person that the promise of success wasn’t supported by intelligence or mentality.

As regards the future being foreshadowed, it has been demonstrated that the brain is always growing, changing, increasing, or diminishing. These changes commence years before the effect is shown by the thoughts or actions of the individual. A boy ten years old may at that point commence a development which will not be felt until he is thirty, and then it may change his whole life and career. As this development commences at ten, even at that age it has affected certain nerves, and they in their turn have already affected the Line of Head—a full twenty years before the point of change or action has been reached. It therefore follows that the future may[Pg 10] be seen and told by a careful examination of the hand which, as Aristotle has said, is the "organ of all organs, the active agent of the passive powers of the entire system."

Regarding the future that's being hinted at, it's been shown that the brain is always growing, changing, increasing, or decreasing. These changes begin years before they appear in a person's thoughts or actions. A ten-year-old boy might start a development that won't be felt until he's thirty, and then it could change his entire life and career. Since this development starts at ten, it has already impacted certain nerves, which have in turn affected the Line of Head—twenty full years before any change or action takes place. This means the future can[Pg 10] be observed and predicted through a careful examination of the hand, which, as Aristotle pointed out, is the "organ of all organs, the active agent of the passive powers of the entire system."

THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS VARIATIONS

The Line of Head (page 11), or indication of the Mentality of the subject, must in all cases be considered as the most important line on the hand. The greatest attention should be paid to it, so as to obtain a clear grasp of the Mentality under consideration.

The Line of Head (page 11), which reflects the person's mindset, should always be regarded as the most significant line on the hand. It’s essential to pay close attention to it to gain a clear understanding of the mentality being analyzed.

The two hands must be carefully compared—the left showing the inherited tendencies, the right the developed or cultivated qualities. The slightest change or deviation in the markings from the left to the right should be carefully noted down or remembered.

The two hands need to be compared closely—the left reflecting the inherited traits, while the right displays the developed or cultivated qualities. Any small change or difference in the markings from the left to the right should be carefully recorded or remembered.

The direction or the termination or end of the line should, above all, be distinctly noted, for the all-important reason that this shows the direction that the Mentality is inclined to develop towards. For example, if found with the end of the line sloping downwards in the left hand, and having become straight or lying across the palm in the right—the student is safe in concluding that the subject has not been able to follow his natural bent, but by the force of circumstances has been obliged to make himself more practical, to study business methods, and to have undertaken a training towards practicality and level-headedness in order to rise equal to the circumstances that he found himself forced to meet.

The direction or end of the line should be clearly noted, primarily because it indicates how the person's mindset is likely to develop. For instance, if the line's end slopes downwards on the left hand and is straight or lying across the palm on the right, the student can confidently conclude that the person has struggled to follow their natural inclinations. Instead, due to circumstances, they have had to become more practical, learn business methods, and undergo training to be practical and level-headed in order to cope with the challenges they faced.

In this way the student obtains an insight into the earlier conditions of the life under examination that is invaluable, especially when there is, as will be[Pg 11] found in many cases, no Line of Destiny visible in the early years.

In this way, the student gains valuable insight into the earlier conditions of the life being studied, which is especially important when, as will be[Pg 11] seen in many cases, there is no visible Line of Destiny in the early years.

Plate I. THE THREE PRINCIPAL POSITIONS FOR THE COMMENCEMENT OF THE LINE OF HEAD. Plate I. THE THREE MAIN POSITIONS FOR STARTING THE LINE OF THE HEAD.

If, on the contrary, the Line of Head is found exactly in the same position on the right hand as on the left, or even very nearly so, the student can be sure that there was little or no strain in the early years, but that the subject had easy conditions which[Pg 12] were favourable, and which allowed him to develop his natural bent of Mentality.

If, on the other hand, the Line of Head is located in the same spot on the right hand as it is on the left, or very close to it, the student can be confident that there was little to no stress in the early years. Instead, the person had favorable conditions that[Pg 12] allowed them to develop their natural mental abilities.

If, however, it is found that the left hand shows a forked ending to the Line of Head, namely, one end sloping downwards and the other end straight, or nearly so, and that the right hand shows only the straight line, then the student may decide that the subject inherited from the parents two natures, the imaginative and the practical, and that he chose to develop the latter, either in the direction of business or science.

If, however, it’s found that the left hand has a forked ending to the Line of Head, with one end sloping down and the other end straight or nearly straight, while the right hand shows only a straight line, then the student might conclude that the subject inherited two natures from their parents: the imaginative and the practical, and chose to develop the practical one, either in the direction of business or science.

In such a case, the student may state with confidence that the parents of the subject were decidedly opposite in their characteristics. If the line has become straight in the right hand the subject takes more after the side that was practical.

In this situation, the student can confidently say that the subject's parents had very different traits. If the line is straight on the right hand, the subject is more similar to the practical side.

In the case of boys or men it must be remembered that they will take more after their mother's mental peculiarities, and in the case of girls or women that they more generally take after the mental qualities of the father.

In the case of boys or men, it's important to remember that they are more likely to inherit their mother's mental traits, while girls or women generally tend to take after their father's mental qualities.

On a man's left hand that has the forked ending with the upper end straight, or nearly so, the student can state that the mother was the more practical of the parents. If on the right hand the same mark has become clearest the man developed, followed, or cultivated the mental qualities of the mother more than those of the father. When reading a woman's hand the reverse will apply.

On a man's left hand, if the forked ending has the upper part straight or almost straight, it indicates that the mother was the more practical parent. If the same mark is clearer on the right hand, it means the man developed or embraced the mental traits of his mother more than those of his father. When interpreting a woman's hand, the opposite will be true.

If, on the contrary, the lower line was the more developed on the right hand, then the subject, if a man, had developed the imaginative or artistic qualities of the mother, and vice versa if the subject be a girl or a woman.[Pg 13]

If, on the other hand, the lower line was more developed on the right side, then the person, if a man, would have inherited the imaginative or artistic traits from the mother, and vice versa if the person is a girl or a woman.[Pg 13]

When the Line of Head looks light or faint on the left, and strong and clear on the right, the student can safely state that the subject did not inherit any strong mental bent from either parent, but has cultivated and developed his own mentality.

When the Line of Head appears light or faint on the left and strong and clear on the right, the student can confidently say that the person did not inherit any strong mental traits from either parent but has instead cultivated and developed their own mindset.

In such a case the subject has been a hard mental student, and has become mentally superior to his or her parents. This is often found in the case of "self-made" men or women, who have had little or no education in their early life or in their home, but who from an innate love of education developed themselves mentally. Such a sign would speak volumes for the will power and ambition of the subject under examination.

In this situation, the person has worked hard academically and has become more mentally advanced than their parents. This is often the case with "self-made" individuals who received little to no education during their early years or at home but cultivated a deep love for learning that allowed them to grow intellectually. Such a trait would highlight the willpower and ambition of the person being analyzed.

If the Line of Head is lighter and poorer on the right hand than on the left, the student can state that the subject has not made the most of his opportunities mentally, and that he has not, and never will, equal the brain power and education of his or her parents.

If the Line of Head is lighter and weaker on the right side than on the left, the student can conclude that the person hasn’t fully utilized their mental opportunities, and that they haven't, and likely never will, match the intelligence and education of their parents.

In such a case one may also be sure that the subject has not a very strong will power—at least mentally—although he might be very obstinate by nature, which will be seen from the quality exhibited by the nail phalange of the thumb (page 129).

In this situation, you can also be sure that the person doesn't have a very strong willpower—at least not mentally—though they might be pretty stubborn by nature, as can be seen from the characteristics shown by the thumb's nail phalange (page 129).

A poor or non-developed Line of Head in the right hand of any man or woman is also the indication of a lack of purpose or ambition—there being no ambition where a want of mental desire and development is so distinctly shown.

A weak or underdeveloped Line of Head on the right hand of any person is also a sign of a lack of purpose or ambition—since there's no ambition when there's such a clear absence of mental desire and development.

A clean cut deep Line of Head is a more powerful sign of mentality than when the line is very broad, or lying, as it were, merely on the surface of the palm.

A well-defined, deep Line of Head is a stronger indication of mental capacity than a line that is very wide or just sits on the surface of the palm.

A wide broad line shows less concentration and a[Pg 14] more vacillating changeable nature. This rule applies with equal truth to all the lines on the palm.

A wide line indicates less focus and a[Pg 14] more fluctuating and changeable nature. This principle holds true for all the lines on the palm.

Broad, coarse-looking lines are more a constitutional sign than a mental indication. They are often found in cases where the subject leads a robust outdoor life, and those who have developed the physical side of their nature more than the mental.

Broad, rough-looking lines are more of a physical characteristic than a mental reflection. They're often seen in people who live a strong, active outdoor lifestyle, especially those who have focused more on their physical development than their mental one.

Great brain workers usually have thin, fine, clean-looking lines, and especially that of the Line of Head.

Great thinkers typically have delicate, clear, and refined lines, especially when it comes to the Line of Head.

It will thus be seen that by observation the student will be enabled to class the sort of life led by the person under examination. No matter how intellectual a man or woman may look, the lines on the hand will indicate whether or not they have developed their intellectuality. In this way it will be seen that a study of the hand becomes a far more accurate guide than the study of the face. Many men and women may have handsome, intellectual faces and yet prefer sport or outdoor life to any mental pursuit or exercise.

It can be observed that by examining someone, a student can determine the type of life that person leads. Regardless of how intellectual someone appears, the lines on their hand will reveal whether they have truly developed their intellect. Therefore, studying the hand proves to be a more reliable indicator than studying the face. Many people may have attractive, intellectual faces, but they might prefer sports or outdoor activities over any kind of mental challenge or pursuit.

Turning from an examination of the direction of ending of the Line of Head, the student must next examine the indications of the beginnings of this important Line. For example, the Line of Head may commence in three distinct different ways.

Turning away from examining the direction of the ending of the Line of Head, the student must next look at the signs of the beginnings of this important line. For instance, the Line of Head can start in three clearly different ways.

(1) From inside the Line of Life (1-1, Plate I.).
(2) Joined to the Line of Life (2-2, Plate I.).
(3) And outside the Line of Life (3-3, Plate I.).

(1) From inside the Line of Life (1-1, Plate I.).
(2) Connected to the Line of Life (2-2, Plate I.).
(3) And outside the Line of Life (3-3, Plate I.).

The first is the most uncertain of all. It denotes an over-sensitive, over-cautious, timid person. It also indicates a highly nervous, easily excited individual, one who has little control over himself or his temper, who is easily put out over trifles, and liable to[Pg 15] do the most erratic things, or fly off at a tangent when irritated. Such people are always in trouble, generally fighting or quarrelling with those about them and over things that are of no consequence. They are likewise so easily wounded in their feelings, that even a look or an imagined slight will put them out of humour or upset them for days.

The first type is the most uncertain of all. It describes someone who is overly sensitive, overly cautious, and timid. It also points to a highly nervous and easily excited person, someone who struggles to control themselves or their temper, who gets upset over small things, and who is likely to do the most erratic things or go off on a tangent when annoyed. These individuals are always getting into trouble, often fighting or arguing with those around them over issues that don’t matter. They are also so easily hurt emotionally that even a glance or a perceived slight can throw them off or upset them for days.

If this Line of Head farther out in the palm become straight, it denotes that the subject will, later, by the development of his intelligence largely overcome this failing of over-sensitiveness. If the line slope much or bend down towards the wrist or on to the Mount of Luna (the Mount of Imagination), then the subject will become still worse with his advancing years. If the Line of Head is also poorly marked, or with "hairlines" from it, it is often the indication of some form of insanity which is likely to cause the subject to be placed under restraint in later life.

If the Line of Head is straighter as it extends further out in the palm, it suggests that the person will eventually overcome their issue of being overly sensitive through the growth of their intelligence. If the line slopes significantly or curves down toward the wrist or the Mount of Luna (the Mount of Imagination), then the person will likely become even more troubled as they age. If the Line of Head is faint or has "hairlines" branching off it, it can often indicate some form of insanity that may lead to the person being confined later in life.

If, with this latter indication, the student also finds all the upward main lines, such as the Line of Destiny, etc., fading out past the middle of the palm, the indication of insanity and restraint becomes all the more certain.

If, with this later indication, the student also sees all the main upward lines, like the Line of Destiny, fading beyond the middle of the palm, the sign of insanity and restraint becomes even more certain.

This class of Head Line is largely found in cases where the subject is naturally inclined towards drink and intemperance of every description.

This type of Head Line is often seen in cases where the person tends to indulge in alcohol and various excesses.

Even in cases where there are good lines running up the palm, it will usually be found that the subject gives way to occasional fits of intemperance or the desire for drugs. The qualities of the fiery Mount of Mars, from which such a Line of Head starts inside the Life Line, is largely the cause of the peculiarities above indicated. The opposite Mount of Mars (page 141) on the side of the hand, on the contrary, gives[Pg 16] mental control, so that even when the Line of Head runs out straight on the palm it partakes of this "Mental Mars" quality, and so denotes that later on in years the subject with such a Line of Head will be able to develop mental control. The sloping Line of Head, however, would denote that the subject allows himself to turn, as it were, away from mental control, and so lets the earlier tendencies become his master.

Even in situations where there are clear lines on the palm, it's usually noticeable that the person tends to have occasional issues with excess or cravings for substances. The traits associated with the fiery Mount of Mars, where the Line of Head begins inside the Life Line, largely contribute to these peculiarities. In contrast, the opposite Mount of Mars (page 141) on the side of the hand provides mental control; so even if the Line of Head runs straight across the palm, it still reflects this "Mental Mars" characteristic, suggesting that as time goes on, the person with such a Line of Head will gain mental control. However, a sloped Line of Head suggests that the person tends to stray away from mental discipline, allowing earlier inclinations to dominate them.

This point alone is worthy of the consideration of all parents, and if observed by them would do much to help such children to develop mental control over themselves. The accompanying plates show this formation of the Line of Head in all its variations.

This point alone deserves the attention of all parents, and if they take note of it, it would greatly help such children develop self-control. The accompanying images illustrate the formation of the Line of Head in all its variations.

THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE

The position of this line indicates in all cases a highly sensitive disposition, which inclines towards the side of caution and also lacks self-confidence (2-2, Plate I.). Even the cleverest people with this sign seem to rein themselves in too tightly, and are always inclined to undervalue their capabilities and talents.

The position of this line shows a very sensitive nature that tends to err on the side of caution and often struggles with self-confidence (2-2, Plate I.). Even the smartest people with this sign seem to hold themselves back too much and often underestimate their own abilities and talents.

When, with the same indication, the line is also sloping slightly downwards, the sensitiveness is still more increased. This form is largely found on the hands of artists, painters, and those who even in other walks of life have the sensitive artistic temperament, even though it may not have been developed to a larger extent. If, on the contrary, the Line of Head joined to the Line of Life runs straight out across the hand towards the mental Mount of Mars (2-2, Plate I.), the subject, though still extremely sensitive, has got greater courage of his opinions. Such people do not get credit for being as highly sensitive as do[Pg 17] the other people with the line sloping downwards towards the Mount of Imagination. The straighter the Head Line is found, the subject can be more relied on to carry out his determination, and often these highly sensitive and even nervous people are found doing very determined work in connection with some battle for principle or for right which they believe it their moral duty to carry out. If this class of Line of Head, however, go very far across the hand and straight on to the Mental Mount of Mars, it indicates an extremely strong-willed determined person who has the power to hide his sensitiveness and nervousness and stake everything for what he believes his duty to carry out.

When the line has the same indication but also slopes slightly downward, sensitivity is even more heightened. This pattern is commonly seen in the hands of artists, painters, and those with an artistic temperament, even if it hasn't fully developed. Conversely, if the Line of Head connects with the Line of Life and extends straight across the hand toward the mental Mount of Mars (2-2, Plate I.), the person, while still very sensitive, shows more courage in their opinions. These individuals are often not recognized as being as sensitive as those whose lines slope downwards toward the Mount of Imagination. The straighter the Head Line, the more reliable the person is in following through on their decisions, and it's common to find these highly sensitive and sometimes anxious people engaged in determined efforts for a cause or principle they feel morally obligated to pursue. However, if this particular Line of Head extends far across the hand and directly to the Mental Mount of Mars, it indicates a person with a very strong will who can conceal their sensitivity and nervousness and commit everything to what they believe is their duty.

The difference in the observation of these two distinct classes of individuals, namely, those with the Line of Head joined but sloping, and the Line of Head joined and straight across the hand, has caused many exponents of this study to make great mistakes in the judgment of their subject. When, as is very often the case, the Line of Head is forked (3-3, Plate II.), also when joined and when these forked lines are equal to one another, especially in cases where the Line of Head is joined to the Line of Life showing the sensitive temperament, this forked mark often indicates a certain want of decision. The subject is inclined to balance too much between the two qualities of brain, the practical and the imaginative. As to what they should do for the best, in such cases it is always wise to advise the subject to act according to first impulse either in dealing with practical or imaginative things. By so doing they employ, as it were, the intuition of the brain, and by using it do not waver and vacillate by too much reasoning[Pg 18] over the question or endeavouring to see both sides of it at once. When the sloping Line of Head has a gentle curve downwards towards the Mount of the Moon (1-1, Plate II.), distinct control over the imagination is indicated. The student will then know that the subject simply uses his imagination when he wishes to do so instead of being controlled by it. But the contrary is the case when the line bends too far down this Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In this case the[Pg 19] subject is the slave of his imagination and generally does erratic and peculiar things or can only work in moods of the moment. People of this latter class seldom, if ever, produce the great results in the world of art or imagination as do those who have the line simply curving downwards into this Mount.

The difference in observing these two distinct groups of people—those with a sloping Line of Head and those with a straight-across Line of Head—has led many practitioners of this study to make significant errors in their assessments. Often, when the Line of Head is forked (3-3, Plate II), and especially when these forked lines are equal and connected to the Line of Life, it indicates a sensitive temperament and often shows a lack of decisiveness. This situation leads the person to struggle to balance the practical and imaginative aspects of their thinking. When in doubt about the best course of action, it's usually advisable for the individual to trust their first impulse, whether it’s related to practical matters or creative ideas. Doing this allows them to tap into their brain's intuition and prevents them from getting stuck in endless reasoning or trying to view the issue from multiple perspectives. If the sloping Line of Head gently curves down toward the Mount of the Moon (1-1, Plate II), it indicates good control over imagination. The practitioner will recognize that the person can choose to use their imagination when desired instead of being controlled by it. Conversely, if the line bends too far down toward this Mount (4-4, Plate II), the individual becomes a slave to their imagination, often leading to erratic and unorthodox actions or only functioning in brief, mood-driven bursts. Those in this latter category rarely, if ever, achieve the same level of artistic or imaginative success as those whose line simply curves downward into this Mount.

Plate II. THE LINE OF HEAD JOINED TO THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS TERMINATIONS. Plate II. THE HEAD LINE CONNECTED TO THE LIFE LINE AND ITS ENDPOINTS.

When the Line of the Head bends completely down and turns with a curve, as it were, under the base of the Mount of Luna (5-5, Plate II.), the tendency is to extreme morbid imaginings and such extreme sensitiveness, that people on whose hands it is found generally separate themselves from the rest of their fellows, and either retire from the world altogether and live a solitary life or else make their exit by the gate of suicide. The latter is, in fact, generally the ending of such lives. Their extreme sensitiveness evidently renders life for them almost unbearable. But this formation must not be confounded with the Line of Head curving downwards through the upper part of the Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In this latter case, it can even descend as far down as the wrist itself, and, unless it has an island or star at the end of the line, there is not the danger of suicide. In all such cases, however, there is extreme imagination, extreme sensibility, and a tendency to melancholy and morbidness, but there is no indication of the brain breaking down under strain as there is in the other case of what is known as the distinct tendency for self-murder.

When the Line of the Head bends all the way down and curves under the base of the Mount of Luna (5-5, Plate II.), it indicates a tendency towards extreme morbid thoughts and such intense sensitivity that people with this trait often isolate themselves from others. They may either withdraw from society completely to live a solitary life or tragically choose to end their lives. Unfortunately, the latter often becomes the conclusion for these individuals. Their heightened sensitivity makes life almost unbearable for them. However, this formation should not be confused with the Line of Head that curves downwards through the upper part of the Mount (4-4, Plate II.). In this latter case, the line can even extend down to the wrist, and unless there is an island or star at the end of the line, there isn't the same risk of suicide. In all these situations, though, there is notable imagination, heightened sensitivity, and a tendency towards melancholy and morbid thoughts, but there’s no sign of the brain being overwhelmed under stress as there is in the other case known for a distinct tendency towards self-harm.

THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE

The Line of Head is more frequently found connected with than separated from the Line of Life.[Pg 20] When the space is not very wide (3-3, Plate I.), it is an excellent mark to have, giving independence of thought, quickness of judgment, and a certain mental daring that is invaluable in fighting the battle of life. When the Line of Head is at the same time lying fairly straight across the palm, such individuals have an immense power over others, but their capabilities are always more distinctly shown if they should in any form go in for some kind of public life. People[Pg 21] possessing this mark are rather less "hard students" than those with the Line of Head and Line of Life joined together, but they have such brilliancy and quickness of thought that they seem to see in a flash that which takes the other class hard work to attain. But these people with the "open Line of Head" must, above all things, have purpose in their life. Without purpose they are rather like a ship drifting on an idle sea. They may spend their life in an aimless way unless "the call" comes to them or the tide of ambition turns their way and carries them onward.

The Line of Head is more often found connected to the Line of Life than it is separated from it.[Pg 20] When the gap between the two lines isn't very wide (3-3, Plate I.), it's a great sign to have, indicating independence of thought, quick judgment, and a certain mental boldness that's invaluable in navigating life's challenges. When the Line of Head runs fairly straight across the palm, these individuals have significant influence over others, but their strengths are even more evident if they pursue some form of public life. People[Pg 21] with this mark are generally less "hardworking students" than those with the Line of Head and Line of Life joined, but their brilliance and quick thinking allow them to grasp things in an instant, whereas others may find it requires considerable effort. However, those with the "open Line of Head" must, above all, have a purpose in their life. Without a purpose, they can end up like a ship drifting on a calm sea. They may spend their lives aimlessly unless "the call" comes to them or the tide of ambition shifts in their favor and propels them forward.

Plate III. THE LINE OF HEAD SEPARATED FROM THE LINE OF LIFE. Plate III. THE HEAD LINE SEPARATED FROM THE LIFE LINE.

The same class of line but sloping is the more uncertain of the two characters, because the person is still more inclined to work only by moods. If the mood or the desire does not come, such people, although always brilliant and clever, may often waste their lives doing nothing.

The same type of line, but sloping, is the more unpredictable of the two traits, as the person is even more likely to act based on their moods. If the mood or desire doesn't strike, these individuals, despite being consistently sharp and talented, can end up wasting their lives accomplishing nothing.

Those people with the Line of Head "open" and ascending slightly upwards towards or on to the Mental Mount of Mars (3-3, Plate III.), are self-appointed leaders, organizers of any public movement. They will sacrifice everything, home, affection, and all ties for what they believe is their public duty in connection with the work that they have undertaken.

Those people with the Line of Head "open" and slightly rising towards or on the Mental Mount of Mars (3-3, Plate III.) are self-appointed leaders and organizers of any public movement. They will sacrifice everything—home, affection, and all relationships—for what they believe is their public duty related to the work they have taken on.

The Line of Head very open and separate from the Line of Life denotes a character with too little caution or sensitiveness (4-4, Plate III.). The subject will go to the opposite extreme of him with the Line of Head and Line of Life joined. When the space is very wide it denotes excessive impetuosity and lack of continuity of purpose, a person who pushes himself forward on all occasions, a great desire for notoriety and one continually changing his plans as far as the world is concerned. When this line is excessively[Pg 22] open or separate from the Line of Life, the brain seems to be an extremely excitable one. The subject suffers greatly from excessive blood to the head, mental hysteria, sleeplessness, and all things that affect the brain. If the Line of Head is badly formed with islands, or a broad line with breaks and hair lines (1-1, Plate IV.), it is just as much a mark of another form of insanity as the Line of Head curving downwards at the wrist, but with the line mentioned the type is inclined to be morbid with a tendency to suicide.

The Line of Head, which is very open and far from the Line of Life, indicates a person who lacks caution and sensitivity (4-4, Plate III.). This individual contrasts sharply with someone whose Line of Head and Line of Life are connected. A wide gap suggests impulsiveness and inconsistency in goals, someone who always pushes themselves into the spotlight, craves attention, and frequently changes their plans in relation to others. When this line is excessively[Pg 22] open or separated from the Line of Life, it indicates a highly excitable mind. Such a person often suffers from too much blood flow to the head, mental distress, insomnia, and other brain-related issues. If the Line of Head is poorly formed with islands, or has a broad shape with breaks and hairlines (1-1, Plate IV.), it can signify another type of mental instability similar to a downward curve of the Line of Head at the wrist, but with this variation, the person tends to be morbid and may have suicidal tendencies.

This other Line of Head with islands indicates the character that will be more likely to be excitable and fly into a temper and kill other people. A Line of Head not too widely separated and either one end of it commencing on the Mount of Jupiter, or with its main branch from the Mount of Jupiter (4-4, Plate III.), is one of the most brilliant marks of all. The student must, however, carefully establish this difference of the Line of Head in his own mind, as well as the termination or the ending of this line. Once he has these two points firmly established, he has gained the great keynote to this subject. When once this part is mastered, he has a sure foundation to work on.

This other Line of Head with islands shows a personality that is more likely to be excitable and easily lose their temper, possibly harming others. A Line of Head that isn’t too widely spaced, with one end starting on the Mount of Jupiter, or with its main branch coming from the Mount of Jupiter (4-4, Plate III.) is one of the most significant signs. The student must carefully recognize the differences in the Line of Head in their mind, as well as how this line ends. Once they establish these two points clearly, they have the key to understanding this topic. Mastering this part provides a solid foundation to build on.

My next remarks will relate to the minor marks and their meaning, and to islands or breaks on or in the Line of Head.

My next comments will focus on the minor marks and what they mean, as well as islands or gaps on or in the Line of Head.

THE LINE OF HEAD AND ITS SECONDARY SIGNS

What are known as "islands" in the Line of Head are very important, especially if they are considered both in relation to the age at which they occur, and also in relation to the mentality itself.[Pg 23]

What are called "islands" in the Line of Head are really significant, especially when you think about both the age they happen and the mindset involved.[Pg 23]

In the first place the principal rule the student must bear in mind is, that islands must be considered as showing a weakness in any line wherever they may be found, and are to be considered unfortunate signs.

The main rule the student should keep in mind is that islands indicate a weakness in any line they appear, and they should be seen as unfortunate signs.

On the Line of Head when found in the form of a continuous chain (1-1, Plate IV.), all through the line, they denote mental weakness, but generally produced by ill-health which more immediately affects the brain.

On the Line of Head, when it's seen as a continuous chain (1-1, Plate IV.), it indicates mental weakness throughout that line, usually caused by poor health that has a direct impact on the brain.

Such mental weakness or "brain illness," if found with nails showing very small "moons" or none at all, denotes an anæmic condition of the blood that affects the brain, a low condition of vitality and bad circulation, which seems to starve the brain of blood and prevents such people from making any continuous effort in regard to study or will power, and causes them to act in an erratic fashion.

Such mental weakness or "brain illness," if present with nails showing very small "moons" or none at all, indicates an anemic condition of the blood that impacts the brain, a low level of vitality, and poor circulation, which seems to deprive the brain of blood and prevents these individuals from making any sustained effort in terms of studying or willpower, causing them to behave in an erratic manner.

If at the same time the Line of Head is seen placed very high on the hand, this sign is worse still in its meaning, and such subjects are inclined to be "half mad" in periods.

If the Line of Head is positioned very high on the hand, this sign is even worse in its meaning, and people with this feature tend to be "half mad" at times.

When the Line of Head is widely separated from the Line of Life, then this chain formation of islands is still more accentuated and more difficult to cure. Such subjects have periods of mental excitability which it seems impossible for them to control, and in such moments they are liable to fly off at a tangent and commit mad or rash acts, but acts generally dangerous to other people.

When the Line of Head is far from the Line of Life, this formation of islands becomes even more pronounced and harder to fix. People with this trait experience times of mental restlessness that they can't seem to manage, and during these moments, they are prone to suddenly acting out and making reckless decisions, usually putting others at risk.

When, however, the Line of Head is very sloping (2-2, Plate IV.), with this formation of islands the subject is inclined to have fits of depression and melancholy, during which he is likely to shrink away from people or make an attempt against his own life.[Pg 24] "Suicide while temporarily insane" is the verdict of the jury in such cases.

When the Line of Head is very sloping (2-2, Plate IV.), this type of formation often leads the person to experience bouts of depression and sadness, during which they may withdraw from others or even attempt to take their own life.[Pg 24] In these cases, the jury typically concludes with the verdict of "suicide while temporarily insane."

Plate IV. ISLANDS ON THE LINE OF HEAD. Plate IV. ISLANDS ON THE HEADLINE.

Another important point of consideration in relation to the islands in the Line of Head, is to note their position on the line itself, or under what finger they make their appearance. When these islands are found at the commencement of the line under the first finger or Mount of Jupiter (3, Plate IV.), it will be found that the subject in early life was delicate mentally,[Pg 25] and displayed no energy of will; no desire to study, was listless and without ambition.

Another important thing to consider regarding the islands in the Line of Head is their position on the line itself, or which finger they appear under. When these islands are located at the start of the line under the first finger or Mount of Jupiter (3, Plate IV.), it's usually seen that the person experienced a fragile mental state in early life, showed no strong will, lacked interest in studying, and was generally apathetic and unambitious.[Pg 25]

Under the second finger on the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate IV.), the subject, on the contrary, is inclined to suffer from severe headaches, morbidness, melancholy, and a tendency for inflammation, especially at the base of the head.

Under the second finger on the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate IV.), the subject, on the other hand, is likely to experience intense headaches, gloominess, sadness, and a tendency for inflammation, particularly at the base of the head.

If the line looks weak or frays into little hair lines from this point out, it shows that the subject will never recover thoroughly from this malady.

If the line looks weak or frays into tiny strands from this point on, it indicates that the subject will never fully recover from this condition.

Under the third finger, the Mount of Sun (5, Plate IV.), an island shows a very curious fact, namely that the person is inclined to suffer from weakness of the eyes and short-sight. If many of these islands are marked it generally foreshadows a still greater tendency to blindness and weakness of the sight.

Under the third finger, the Mount of Sun (5, Plate IV.), there's an island that reveals an interesting fact: the person tends to struggle with weak eyesight and nearsightedness. If there are several of these islands present, it usually indicates an even stronger likelihood of blindness and visual impairment.

Islands under the fourth finger, the Mount of Mercury (6, Plate IV.), and the extremity of the Head Line denote weakness of the brain in old age, and a highly nervous worrying disposition. If very badly marked they denote that in the latter part of life the subject may be disposed to insanity proceeding from a worrying disposition, and often from the overstraining of the mental faculties. It will thus be seen that every portion of this remarkable line may be divided into sections to obtain marvellous detail in making predictions for the future.

Islands under the fourth finger, the Mount of Mercury (6, Plate IV.), and the end of the Head Line indicate weakness of the brain in old age, along with a very nervous and anxious personality. If they are marked very poorly, they suggest that in later life, the person may be prone to insanity due to anxiety and often from overexerting their mental abilities. This shows that each section of this notable line can be divided to provide incredible detail for making future predictions.

This line can further be divided, showing with considerable clearness the ages at which troubles or changes in the mentality may be expected.

This line can be broken down further, clearly indicating the ages at which issues or shifts in mindset might be anticipated.

Under the first finger the period of the life indicated is the first 21 years, the second period contains another section of the three 7's, and lasts until 42 years of age; the third period of 7's which will be found under[Pg 26] the third finger indicates the section from 49 to 63, and the fourth section which takes in the remainder of the hand, under the fourth finger, stands for the period from 70 up to the end.

Under the first finger, the time indicated covers the first 21 years. The second period, which includes another set of three 7s, lasts until age 42. The third period of 7s, found under[Pg 26] the third finger, indicates the years from 49 to 63. The fourth period, which takes up the rest of the hand under the fourth finger, represents the time from 70 onward.

CHANGES IN THE LINE OF HEAD

Another extremely interesting point in studying the Line of Head is to take notice of certain changes in its position, or lines either dropping or rising from it, which will also be found to give very remarkable information. For example: if a sloping Line of Head at any point in its track seems to curve or slightly bend upwards (1-1, Plate V.), it indicates that about that period of the person's life some unusual strain will be forced upon him. If this curved line is clearly marked and not interfered with by things that look like blotches in it, the person, although of a completely opposite turn of mind to the practical, will yet rise superior to the occasion, and for the time being will develop a practical or business-like way of looking at things which may even be the very reverse of the nature.

Another really interesting aspect of studying the Line of Head is to notice certain changes in its position, or lines that either drop or rise from it, which will also provide very insightful information. For example: if a sloping Line of Head at any point in its path seems to curve or slightly bend upwards (1-1, Plate V.), it shows that around that time in the person's life, they will face some unusual pressure. If this curved line is clearly defined and not marred by any blotches, the person, despite having a mindset that's completely opposite to being practical, will still rise to the challenge, and for that moment, they'll develop a practical or business-like perspective that may even be the complete opposite of their usual nature.

If, however, instead of the curve or bend a fine line is seen leaving the Head Line in an upward direction (2-2, Plate V.), that period will leave a definite mark on the subject's entire character for the remainder of his life. In some cases these fine lines will, after a few years, appear to develop more strongly, and may even become a kind of second Head Line. This would denote that the person continues to cultivate the practical side of his nature that was at that period called into existence.

If, however, instead of a curve or bend, a straight line is seen emerging from the Head Line in an upward direction (2-2, Plate V.), that period will have a significant impact on the person's character for the rest of their life. In some cases, these straight lines may appear to develop more prominently after a few years and could even form a sort of second Head Line. This would indicate that the person continues to nurture the practical side of their nature that was awakened during that time.

If one were examining a straight Line of Head and[Pg 27] noticed a curve downward or a fine line growing downwards from it (3-3, Plate V.), the natural interpretation of such a mark would be that at that date in the person's career he had become less practical, or for the time being developed the more imaginative qualities of the mentality. In this latter case, curiously enough, it often denotes that the person had at that period of his life become more wealthy or prosperous,[Pg 28] and so he was able to develop the artistic side of his nature. It is logical to assume that he could only have done this if the strain in the practical battle had been lessened about that time, but this must only be presumed if, at about the same date, the Sun Line (Plate XV.) were seen clearly marked or suddenly appearing on the hand, then the student can be positive in assuming that at that date greater ease and comfort came into the subject's life and he consequently turned to the more imaginative side of existence.

If someone is looking at a straight Line of Head and[Pg 27] notices a downward curve or a fine line extending downward from it (3-3, Plate V.), the common interpretation of such a mark would be that at that point in the person's life, they had become less practical or had temporarily developed more imaginative qualities in their thinking. Interestingly, in this latter case, it often suggests that the person became more wealthy or successful during this time,[Pg 28] allowing them to explore their artistic side. It's reasonable to assume that they could only have done this if the pressures from their practical struggles had eased around that time. However, this assumption holds true only if, around the same date, the Sun Line (Plate XV.) was clearly marked or suddenly appeared on their hand. Then, the observer can confidently conclude that during that time, greater ease and comfort entered the subject's life, prompting them to embrace the more imaginative aspects of life.

Plate V. MORE VARIATIONS OF THE LINE OF HEAD. Plate V. MORE VARIATIONS OF THE HEADLINE.

If the Line of Head itself should curve upward, especially at the end towards the fourth finger or Mount of Mercury (4-4, Plate V.), it denotes almost without exception that the longer the person lives the more his desire for money and his determination to possess it will become stronger every year.

If the Line of Head curves upward, especially towards the end near the fourth finger or Mount of Mercury (4-4, Plate V.), it almost always indicates that the longer a person lives, the stronger their desire for money and their determination to acquire it will grow each year.

If the Line of Head apparently partly leaves its natural place, which will be seen by an examination of the left hand, and completely rises as it were to the Line of Heart (5-5, Plate V.), the person will develop an enormous fixity of purpose for some one desire. He will apparently and deliberately control the affectionate side of his nature by his will power, and will stick at nothing to obtain the realisation of whatever his desire may be. If this mark is found on a square thick-set material looking hand, it is a foregone conclusion that the subject has set his determination on some material object, such as wealth, and he will stop at nothing, even crime, in carrying out his aim. If this mark is found on a long hand the object of the ambition is certain to be connected with intellectual power over people and absolute determination to accomplish whatever the purpose of the career may be.

If the Line of Head seems to move away from its usual position, which can be seen by examining the left hand, and completely rises up to the Line of Heart (5-5, Plate V.), the person will develop an intense focus on a particular desire. They will consciously and deliberately control their emotional side using willpower and will stop at nothing to achieve their desire. If this mark is found on a square, sturdy-looking hand, it’s a sure sign that the person is determined to pursue a material objective, like wealth, and they won't hesitate, even resorting to crime, to reach that goal. If this mark appears on a long hand, the ambition is likely tied to gaining intellectual control over others and a strong determination to fulfill whatever their career purpose is.

This mark must not be confounded with one clear[Pg 29] line running across the hand from side to side (Plate VI.), because in this case the Line of Head has not risen out of its position, but simply denotes tremendous intensity of character, for good or evil as the case may be; such a person would exhibit great power of concentration, and if he concentrated his mentality on any purpose he would unite with it his heart[Pg 30] nature. But if he had set his heart or affections on any person, he would unite with that desire the whole force of his mental nature. In this case it is as if these two sides of the mentality, the sentimental and the mental, were linked or in some way united together. Such persons I have always found possess greater intensity of purpose than any other, but I have never found it a very happy mark to possess.

This mark shouldn't be confused with a single clear[Pg 29] line that runs across the hand from side to side (Plate VI.), because in this situation, the Line of Head hasn't moved from its position; it just indicates an intense character, whether for good or bad. A person like this would show a strong ability to focus, and if they dedicated their mind to any goal, they would also involve their heart[Pg 30] in it. However, if they became attached to someone, they would channel all their mental energy into that desire. It’s as if their emotional and rational sides are connected or united in some way. I've always found that such individuals have a greater determination than others, but I haven't found it to be a very fortunate trait to have.

Plate VI. THE LINE OF HEAD AND THE LINE OF HEART RUNNING TOGETHER. Plate VI. THE HEAD LINE AND THE HEART LINE RUNNING TOGETHER.

In the first place, this peculiar type of person appears to be so rare in life that he seems to have no companions and for that reason has always the feeling of being intensely lonely and isolated from others. He is usually also in every way super-sensitive and easily wounded in his feelings. I have seldom found these people successful, unless when acting alone, but if linked with others by partnership in business, etc., they seem to feel their personality cramped, and the partnership as a rule seldom results happily. In considering this, the student must carefully observe whether this one line across the hand lies across the centre where the Head Line would naturally be, or whether it lies higher up towards the base of the fingers where the Heart Line is generally found. If the former case, one may be sure that it is a question of head and mentality and very little heart; but if the latter, it is a question of more intensity of feeling emotion and affection than of mental intensity.

This unique type of person seems so rare that they appear to have no companions, which leads to a persistent feeling of loneliness and isolation. They are usually very sensitive and easily hurt emotionally. I've rarely seen these individuals succeed unless they operate solo; if they enter into partnerships in business or other areas, they often feel stifled, and those partnerships usually don't end well. When considering this, the observer should carefully note whether the line across the hand is positioned at the center, where the Head Line typically is, or if it lies higher, closer to the base of the fingers, where the Heart Line is usually found. If it's the former, it indicates a focus on intellect and mental aspects with little emotional involvement; if it's the latter, it suggests a deeper capacity for feelings and affection over mental intensity.

CROSSES AND SQUARES IN CONNECTION WITH THE LINE OF HEAD

Small, sharply-defined crosses in any position just over or touching the Line of Head are generally signs of accidents to the Head itself.[Pg 31]

Small, clearly defined crosses in any position just over or touching the Line of Head usually indicate accidents to the Head itself.[Pg 31]

Under Jupiter (1, Plate VII.), they usually are brought about by blows caused generally by the subject's desire to rule and to be too dogmatic or tyrannical.

Under Jupiter (1, Plate VII.), they typically happen due to actions driven by the person's desire for power and being overly strict or oppressive.

Under Saturn (2, Plate VII.), crosses indicate injuries to the head from accidents by animals, blows by treachery, mine explosions, etc., and generally relate to accidents of a treacherous nature.

Under Saturn (2, Plate VII.), crosses indicate head injuries from animal accidents, treacherous attacks, mine explosions, and so on, and generally refer to accidents that are deceitful in nature.

Under the Mount of the Sun (3, Plate VII.), these crosses have been found to relate to accidents to the head from sudden falls, such as the subject striking his head by falling, concussion of the brain, etc.

Under the Mount of the Sun (3, Plate VII.), these crosses are linked to head injuries resulting from sudden falls, like someone hitting their head while falling, concussions, and so on.

Under the Mount of Mercury (4, Plate VII.), these sharply defined crosses relate to injuries to the head due to accidents generally produced by scientific experiments or some hazardous business venture.

Under the Mount of Mercury (4, Plate VII.), these clearly defined crosses are connected to head injuries caused by accidents typically resulting from scientific experiments or risky business endeavors.

Small defined squares touching the Line of Head (5, Plate VII.), are in all cases signs of preservation, and they relate to the particular qualities of the Mount of the hand under which they are found. (See chapter on Mounts, page 140.)

Small defined squares touching the Line of Head (5, Plate VII.) are always signs of preservation and are connected to the specific qualities of the Mount of the hand where they are located. (See chapter on Mounts, page 140.)

DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD

Double Lines of Head (6-6, Plate VII.), are as rarely found as are cases of the single line right across the hand. In all cases where the Double Line of Head stands out distinct and clear as two separate lines, the object will be found to have a dual mentality. He is usually capable of an enormous amount of mental work and is of that class of people who carry out two separate mental lives with success. It is often found with one line joined to the Line of Life and the other rising from the Mount of Jupiter; if such is the case, the interpretation would be that one[Pg 32] side of the nature is extremely sensitive and cautious, while the other is self-confident with a great desire to rule or enforce its mental ideas on the world.

Double Lines of Head (6-6, Plate VII.) are as rare as instances of a single line going straight across the hand. Whenever the Double Line of Head clearly appears as two distinct lines, it indicates that the person has a dual mentality. They typically have an immense capacity for mental work and belong to a group of people who successfully lead two separate mental lives. It's often seen with one line connected to the Line of Life and the other coming from the Mount of Jupiter; if this is the case, the interpretation suggests that one aspect of their nature is very sensitive and careful, while the other is self-assured with a strong desire to assert its mental ideas on the world.

Plate VII. DOUBLE LINES OF HEAD, ALSO CROSSES AND SQUARES. Plate VII. DOUBLE HEAD LINES, INCLUDING CROSSES AND SQUARES.

Although such a sign as the Double Line of Head gives a remarkable degree of mentality, yet I have always found it a more successful sign to find one clear Line of Head well marked on the hand than the two Lines of Head in any of their positions.

Although a sign like the Double Line of Head suggests a notable level of intellect, I've consistently found that a single, well-defined Line of Head on the hand is a more reliable indicator than two Lines of Head, regardless of their placement.

Another form of the Double Line of Head (7-7,[Pg 33] Plate VII.), is one where the main line seems to separate about the middle of the hand, and where one branch goes across the hand and the other descends towards the Mount of the Moon. In such a case we get the double mental personality, but one which is more under the control of the will of the subject, whereas the two double distinct lines denote that the two mental personalities seem to act independently one from the other.

Another version of the Double Line of Head (7-7,[Pg 33] Plate VII.) is where the main line appears to split around the middle of the hand, with one branch crossing the hand while the other descends toward the Mount of the Moon. In this case, we observe a double mental personality that is more influenced by the individual's will, whereas the two distinct double lines suggest that the two mental personalities operate independently of each other.

It has been considered by many ancient authorities that the Double Line of Head, when found with two distinct lines, is a sign of the inheritance of great riches or power. I have generally found, however, that what it means is, that although the financial results of such a person's life may be either great wealth or power, yet he may inherit it from his mental right and not from his birth right.

Many ancient experts believe that when the Double Line of Head shows two separate lines, it indicates the inheritance of great wealth or power. However, I've usually found that this means that while a person may achieve significant wealth or power in their life, it may come from their intelligence and not their family background.

THE LINE OF HEAD ON THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS

There are seven distinct types of hands, bearing in their own way more or less relationship to the Seven Races of Humanity (page 118).

There are seven different types of hands, each having their own unique connection to the Seven Races of Humanity (page 118).

These seven types of hands are as follows:

These seven types of hands are as follows:

   I.—The Elementary or Lowest type.
  II.—The Square, also called the Useful or Practical.
 III.—The Spatulate or Active.
 IV.—The Philosophic.
  V.—The Conic or Artistic.
 VI.—The Psychic or Idealistic.
VII.—The Mixed Hand.

I.—The Basic or Lowest type.
  II.—The Square, also known as the Useful or Practical.
 III.—The Spatulate or Active.
 IV.—The Philosophical.
  V.—The Conic or Artistic.
 VI.—The Psychic or Idealistic.
VII.—The Mixed Hand.

As a rule the Line of Head is generally found in accordance with the type of hand on which it is seen, namely, lying straight or what is called "level-headed" on the Square-looking or Practical hand; or sloping, and thus indicating the more imaginative qualities on the Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types.

As a rule, the Line of Head usually matches the type of hand it appears on. It typically lies straight or is described as "level-headed" on the Square-looking or Practical hand, while it slopes on the Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types, indicating more imaginative qualities.

Consequently, if it be found on a hand in what may be called opposition to its class, such a Line of Head immediately possesses a greater significance.

Consequently, if it’s found on a hand that is in opposition to its class, such a Line of Head immediately holds greater significance.

For example, if a sloping Line of Mentality were seen on the Square or Practical hand, it would indicate that though the bases of that man or woman's thoughts and plans were of the practical kind, yet they possessed a far greater power of imagination than any casual observer would at first sight give them credit for.

For example, if a sloping Line of Mentality appeared on the Square or Practical hand, it would suggest that even though the foundation of that person's thoughts and plans was practical, they actually had a much greater imagination than a casual observer might initially believe.

On the contrary, if the Line of Head were found straight or level on the Spatulate, Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types, it would denote that the person in question was usually level-headed and practical, even in their highest dreams of philosophy or idealistic creations.

On the other hand, if the Line of Head appears straight or flat on the Spatulate, Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic types, it means that the person is generally level-headed and practical, even in their most lofty philosophical thoughts or idealistic ideas.

On the Elementary hand the Line of Head is usually found short, straight, and coarse-looking, often nothing more than a short deep-set furrow. Consequently, if found long and clear, it would indicate a superior mental development in a coarse brutal or animal nature.

On the elementary hand, the Line of Head is usually short, straight, and rough-looking, often appearing as just a deep-set groove. Therefore, if it is long and clear, it would suggest a higher level of mental development in a crude, brutal, or animalistic nature.

If in a Square-looking hand the Line of Head were found sloping instead of long and straight, it would denote an unusual development of the artistic and imaginative qualities, but always with the practical and logical basis for its support.

If someone has a square-shaped palm and the Heart Line curves instead of being long and straight, it would indicate an unusual growth of artistic and imaginative traits, always grounded by a practical and logical foundation.

On the Spatulate hand the natural indication of the[Pg 35] Line of Head is long, clear and sloping, but if found straight or level it would indicate a practical development of the brain endeavouring to set off the active energy and originality indicated by the Spatulate formation.

On the Spatulate hand, the natural sign of the [Pg 35] Line of Head is long, clear, and sloping. If it is found to be straight or level, it would suggest a practical development of the brain trying to channel the active energy and originality shown by the Spatulate shape.

On the Philosophic type, the hand of the thinker and philosopher, the usual position of the Line of Mentality is long and sloping, but if found straight or level it indicates a mental development of the logical and practical qualities which might not be expected in such a class or type.

On the Philosophic type, the hand of the thinker and philosopher, the usual position of the Line of Mentality is long and sloping, but if it’s straight or level, it indicates a mental development of logical and practical qualities that might not be expected in this type.

The same rules hold good with the Conic and Psychic, but with what is called the Mixed type, the best Line of Head to find would be one, long straight and level-looking, because this class, being a mixture as it were of all the others, would require a practical or level-headed mentality to hold its own amid the mixture of tendencies which the last type personifies.[Pg 36]

The same rules apply to the Conic and Psychic types, but for the Mixed type, the ideal Line of Head would be long, straight, and appearing level, because this type combines elements from all the others and needs a practical or level-headed mindset to navigate the various tendencies that characterize it.[Pg 36]


CHAPTER III

THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS

The Line of Life is that line which runs round the base of the thumb and lies directly over a large blood-vessel called the great Palmer Arch (1-1, Plate VIII.). This blood-vessel is more directly connected with the heart, stomach, and vital organs which may have given use to its term "The Vital," as used by the ancients.

The Line of Life is the line that wraps around the base of the thumb and sits directly over a major blood vessel known as the great Palmer Arch (1-1, Plate VIII.). This blood vessel is more directly linked to the heart, stomach, and vital organs, which may have led to its name "The Vital," as referred to by ancient scholars.

It is reasonable to assume that it is this intimate connection with the vital organs of the body which enables it to foretell the length of life from natural causes.

It makes sense to think that this close relationship with the body's vital organs allows it to predict lifespan from natural causes.

If the student will bear this in mind it will make clear and plain to him many difficulties in connection with predictions as to health and disease, and he will follow more easily the following explanations.

If the student keeps this in mind, it will clarify many difficulties related to predictions about health and disease, and he will understand the following explanations more easily.

The first rules to master are, that to be normal the Line of Life should be long, clearly marked, and without any irregularities or breaks of any kind. Such a formation would indicate length of life, vitality, freedom from illness, and strength of constitution (1-1, Plate VIII.).

The first rules to master are that, to be considered normal, the Line of Life should be long, clearly defined, and free of any irregularities or breaks. Such a pattern would suggest longevity, vitality, good health, and a strong constitution (1-1, Plate VIII.).

Bearing the first observation in mind it will be noticed that as the Line of Life represents the stomach and the vital organs, when well marked the[Pg 37] stomach and digestion must necessarily be in a good condition.

Keeping the first observation in mind, you'll notice that since the Line of Life represents the stomach and vital organs, when it's clearly defined, the stomach and digestion must be in good shape.

Plate VIII. THE LINE OF LIFE AND SECTIONS OF INFLUENCES FROM THE MOUNTS. Plate VIII. THE LINE OF LIFE AND SECTIONS OF INFLUENCES FROM THE MOUNTS.

When made up of little pieces or linked like a chain, it is a certain sign of poor health, weak stomach and lack of vitality.

When it's made up of small pieces or connected like a chain, it's a clear sign of poor health, a weak stomach, and low energy.

At this point I must ask the most careful attention to the following rules—which no other book on the subject contains, and which I have not published in any of my other writings, viz.: as the Line of Life[Pg 38] seems in every sense to be the representative on the hand of the body or trunk of the man—so the position of these breaks, marks, links, or islands denotes the portion of the body most affected.

At this point, I need your full attention on the following rules—no other book on the subject has them, and I haven't published them in any of my other writings. The Line of Life[Pg 38] represents the body or trunk of a person in every way, so the location of these breaks, marks, links, or islands indicates which part of the body is most impacted.

Before we go further I must also impress on the student to grasp the fact that every line or sign on the hand plays a dual rôle. By one of their rôles these lines indicate the disease the person is most liable to for the entire run of the life, and in another rôle these lines indicate the date when the illness will reach its greatest gravity.

Before we continue, I want to stress to the student that every line or sign on the hand serves two purposes. One of these purposes is to indicate the disease a person is most likely to have throughout their life, and the other is to show when that illness will become most severe.

To explain carefully this strange phenomenon of nature, I have divided this line into sections (see Plate VIII.), and although I am not writing on astrology in these pages, yet all believers in that science may be interested to find how wonderfully these twin sciences agree when the comparison is pointed out by an impartial observer such as I claim to be.

To carefully explain this strange natural phenomenon, I have broken this line into sections (see Plate VIII.). Although I am not writing about astrology in these pages, I believe that all those who believe in that field might find it fascinating to see how remarkably these two sciences align when compared by an impartial observer like myself.

In Plate VIII. are shown the Sections of the Line of Life with their various tendencies divided by the mounts at the base of the fingers. This will materially assist the student to comprehend their significance and, together with the influence of the month of birth as set out in the chapters on the Mounts of the Hand (page 140), will enable him to obtain an accuracy on all matters relating to health, diseases, and dangers to the life that up till now has never been attained.

In Plate VIII, the sections of the Line of Life are shown with their different tendencies separated by the mounts at the base of the fingers. This will greatly help the student understand their significance and, along with the influence of the month of birth as described in the chapters on the Mounts of the Hand (page 140), will allow them to achieve a level of accuracy on all matters concerning health, diseases, and threats to life that has never been reached before.

We will now proceed to consider the details as regards the Line of Life itself.

We will now look at the details concerning the Line of Life itself.

THE LINE OF LIFE

It is very important at the outset to consider the qualities of this very important line. In some hands[Pg 39] it is broad and shallow on the surface of the hand, in others it is deep and fine; the appearance of this line is very often deceptive, and leads students astray when they have not had their attention called to its appearance.

It’s crucial at the beginning to think about the qualities of this significant line. In some cases[Pg 39], it's wide and shallow on the surface of the hand, while in others it’s deep and fine; the look of this line can often be misleading, distracting students when they haven’t been made aware of its appearance.

The broad, shallow Line of Life often leads people to suppose that it is a sign of a very healthy, robust constitution; but, on the contrary, such an indication is not nearly as good a sign as a clear, thin, deep line. The broad Life Line seems to belong to people who have more robust animal strength, whereas the finer line relates to people who have more nerve or will-force. Under any strain of ill-health, it is the finer line that will hold out, whereas the broad-looking line has not the same resisting force.

The wide, shallow Line of Life often makes people think it's a sign of a very healthy, strong body; however, it's actually not as good a sign as a clear, thin, deep line. The wide Life Line seems to be common in people with more physical strength, while the thinner line is associated with those who have more nerve or willpower. When faced with health issues, it's the thinner line that tends to endure, while the wider line lacks the same resilience.

Very broad lines on the hand denote more muscular strength than will power, and I cannot impress this difference too strongly on the minds of my readers. If the line is made of chain formation (1-1, Plate IX.), it is a sure sign of a tendency to bad health, and especially so if the hand be soft. The same marks on a hard, firm hand would not indicate as much delicacy, because hard, firm hands denote in themselves a robust constitution.

Very broad lines on the hand indicate more physical strength than willpower, and I want to emphasize this difference for my readers. If the line resembles a chain formation (1-1, Plate IX.), it's a clear sign of a tendency toward poor health, especially if the hand is soft. The same marks on a hard, firm hand wouldn't suggest as much delicacy because hard, firm hands usually indicate a strong constitution.

Another important point to consider is, whether the Line of Life goes straight up to the side of the Mount of Venus and narrows that Mount (2-2, Plate IX.), or whether it forms a well-defined curve or semicircle out into the palm (3-3, Plate IX.). In the first case it indicates a naturally more delicate constitution, and less force of animal magnetism. This explanation will be readily understood by readers when I again call their attention to the fact that one of the most important blood-vessels going from the body to the[Pg 40] hand is called the Great Palmer Arch, which carries the blood up to the hand towards the root of the thumb, and carries the circulation back on the other side of the Arch almost underneath the Line of Life. It will, therefore, be seen that people who have a weaker constitution are more likely to have this Great Palmer Arch narrower in construction than those who have a robust constitution and strong circulation of the blood. This is the reason why, when the Mount[Pg 41] of Venus is large and wide on the hand, it gives rise to the idea that it indicates a more passionate animal nature than when this mount is thin and narrow.

Another key point to think about is whether the Line of Life goes straight up to the side of the Mount of Venus and narrows that Mount (2-2, Plate IX.) or if it creates a clear curve or semicircle out into the palm (3-3, Plate IX.). In the first scenario, it suggests a naturally more delicate constitution and less animal magnetism. Readers will easily understand this explanation when I draw their attention to the fact that one of the most important blood vessels running from the body to the[Pg 40] hand is called the Great Palmer Arch. This vessel carries blood up to the hand towards the base of the thumb, and returns circulation on the other side of the Arch almost directly beneath the Line of Life. Therefore, it's evident that individuals with a weaker constitution are more likely to have a narrower Great Palmer Arch compared to those with a strong constitution and healthy blood circulation. This is why, when the Mount[Pg 41] of Venus is large and prominent on the hand, it suggests a more passionate nature compared to when this mount is thin and narrow.

Plate IX. THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS VARIATIONS. Plate IX. THE LINE OF LIFE AND ITS CHANGES.

While speaking on this particular point, I must also call attention to the fact that when the Line of Head is curved downwards instead of running straight across the palm, that it seems to be more attracted to the qualities indicated by the Mount of Venus and gives more to the imaginative, romantic nature, showing a greater tendency to fall in love, than with people who possess the Line of Head running straight across the hand, as if it were not attracted to the qualities indicated by the Mount of Venus. It will thus be seen that every point of this study bearing on character can be reasoned out from a logical standpoint. This places the study upon a higher foundation than when it is considered purely from the superstitious standpoint with which it has so long been associated.

While discussing this point, I also need to highlight that when the Line of Head curves downwards instead of running straight across the palm, it appears to align more with the traits represented by the Mount of Venus and indicates a stronger imaginative, romantic nature, showing a greater tendency to fall in love compared to those with a straight Line of Head, who seem less influenced by the qualities of the Mount of Venus. Therefore, it's clear that every aspect of this study related to character can be logically understood. This elevates the study beyond the superstitious beliefs it has been tied to for so long.

If the Line of Life is seen to rise high on the hand towards the Mount of Jupiter (4-4, Plate IX.), the subject has more control over himself, and his life is more governed by the ambitious side of his nature. When, however, the Line of Life rises lower down on the palm, more from the Mount of Mars (5-5, Plate IX.), it gives less control over the temper. When this sign is noticed, especially in the case of young persons, it will be found that they are more quarrelsome, more disobedient, and have less ambition in connection with their studies.

If the Line of Life appears high on the hand toward the Mount of Jupiter (4-4, Plate IX.), the person has more self-control, and their life is more influenced by their ambitious side. However, when the Line of Life rises lower on the palm, more from the Mount of Mars (5-5, Plate IX.), it indicates less control over their temper. When this sign is observed, especially in younger individuals, they tend to be more argumentative, more rebellious, and less driven regarding their studies.

ASCENDING LINES

When the Line of Life is found with a number of ascending lines, even if they are small, it denotes a[Pg 42] life of greater energy; and the dates at which these lines ascend from the Line of Life may always be considered points at which the subject has made a particular effort towards whatever may have been the special purpose of his destiny at that moment. When these lines are seen ascending towards or on the Mount of Jupiter (1-1, Plate X.), it indicates the desire and ambition to rise in life, especially in some way that would give the subject control or authority over others. If one of the lines be found partly arrested or stopped at the Line of Head (2-2, Plate X.), it indicates that the subject has by some mental error of judgment or stupidity, broken or prevented the effort, which started well, from reaching a successful termination. If one of these lines reaches and stops at the Line of Heart, it indicates that the affections have, or will, interfere with the subject's special effort in whatever direction this line indicates. If one of these lines crosses and joins the line of Fate (3-3, Plate X.), it indicates and gives two distinct dates which are very curious in their meaning. The first date it gives is when this line leaves the Line of Life on its way towards the Line of Fate. The date of this start towards the Line of Fate will be given on the Line of Fate itself, right opposite where this line begins to grow from the Line of Life. This mark will denote that the subject has made a determined effort at that moment in his career to make his own destiny, and to break free from the circumstances or people that surround him or tie him down.

When the Line of Life shows several small ascending lines, it signifies a[Pg 42] life filled with greater energy; the dates when these lines rise from the Line of Life represent key moments when the person has made a significant effort toward their destiny. If these lines are seen moving upward toward or on the Mount of Jupiter (1-1, Plate X.), it suggests a desire and ambition to advance in life, particularly in ways that would grant the person control or authority over others. If one of the lines is halted or stopped at the Line of Head (2-2, Plate X.), it indicates that the person, due to a misjudgment or a lack of understanding, has undermined or prevented the initial effort from successfully concluding. If a line extends and stops at the Line of Heart, it shows that emotions have, or will, interfere with the person's specific effort in the direction indicated by that line. If one of these lines crosses and connects with the Line of Fate (3-3, Plate X.), it signifies two distinct dates that are notably intriguing in their implications. The first date corresponds to when this line departs from the Line of Life heading toward the Line of Fate. The date of this transition toward the Line of Fate will be noted on the Line of Fate itself, directly across from where the line begins to rise from the Line of Life. This mark signifies that the person made a determined effort at that moment in their career to create their own destiny and to escape the circumstances or individuals who confine them.

It is always a successful sign when this line is found to join the Line of Fate, especially if the Line of Fate looks stronger at or about this point of the junction.

It’s always a good sign when this line connects with the Line of Fate, especially if the Line of Fate appears to be stronger around the point where they meet.

The second date is given at the period in the Line[Pg 43] of Life when one is reading down the Line of Life itself. The singular point about this is that a repetition of circumstances will be found to occur in the destiny. Suppose, for example, one saw this line going towards the Fate Line at twenty-six years of age—a circumstance or repetition of the occurrence will be found to occur at almost double that age, namely, fifty-two years of age, which would give a more or less exact date of this occurrence when reading the Line of Life. As an illustration to help the reader I may say that I have generally found that this mark will indicate that the subject has, in the first instance, broken free from some tie at an early date, and that a similar occurrence will take place at the second date, viz., late in life, when again the subject seems to break free from some tie, and goes out more into the world for himself.

The second date is noted during the period in the Line[Pg 43] of Life when someone is looking down the Line of Life itself. The interesting thing about this is that a repetition of circumstances tends to happen in a person's destiny. For instance, if one sees this line approaching the Fate Line at twenty-six years old, a similar circumstance will usually occur almost double that age, at fifty-two years old. This provides a pretty accurate date for this occurrence when examining the Line of Life. To help illustrate, I've generally found that this mark indicates that the person initially breaks free from some obligation at an early age, and a similar situation occurs at the second date, later in life, when the person again seems to break free from a commitment and ventures out more into the world for themselves.

This curious sign very often helps in deciding matters as regards marriage. The man, or woman, will apparently assert his independence more, and leave the ties of home life, and again go out in the world and fight the battle for himself, as he did in the earlier part of his existence, when he probably left his parents' influence and forged ahead for himself.

This interesting sign often helps in making decisions about marriage. The man or woman seems to assert their independence more, stepping away from the ties of home life, and re-entering the world to fight their own battles, just like they did earlier in life when they likely left their parents' influence and moved forward on their own.

When the ascending line is seen crossing over towards the Mount of Saturn, and running as an independent line not joined to the Line of Fate (6, Plate X.), it will be found that the subject has carried out a kind of second fate. The date when this line left the Line of Life will give the first date of its commencement, i.e., opposite it on the Fate Line. If the line be a good one it would give its second date when reading down the Line of Life, where, if the line were good, it carried out this second fate to a successful culmination.[Pg 44]

When the upward line is seen crossing over towards the Mount of Saturn and runs as a separate line not connected to the Line of Fate (6, Plate X.), it indicates that the person has experienced a sort of second destiny. The date when this line separates from the Line of Life marks the start of this second fate, i.e., it is found opposite on the Fate Line. If the line is positive, it will provide its second date when tracing down the Line of Life, where, if the line is favorable, it signifies that this second destiny reached a successful conclusion.[Pg 44]


CHAPTER IV

THE LINE OF MARS OR INNER LIFE LINE

What is called the Line of Mars is that line that is found only on some hands encircling the Mount of Venus and inside the Line of Life.

What’s known as the Line of Mars is the line that appears on some hands, surrounding the Mount of Venus and located within the Line of Life.

This Line, which rises on the Mount of Mars, from which it derives its name, when found clear and strong appears to back up and reinforce the Line of Life (4-4, Plate X.). It indicates great vitality, power of resistance to illness and disease, and is not found on all hands.

This line, which rises on the Mount of Mars, from which it gets its name, when it is clear and strong seems to support and strengthen the Line of Life (4-4, Plate X.). It indicates great vitality, a strong resistance to illness and disease, and isn't found on everyone's hands.

It is an excellent sign on the hands of soldiers, or in connection with all persons who follow a dangerous calling.

It is a great sign for soldiers or anyone involved in a risky profession.

All breaks or bad marks indicated on the Line of Life are minimized on the hands that have this Inner Life Line, or Line of Mars.

All breaks or negative marks shown on the Line of Life are lessened on the hands that have this Inner Life Line, or Line of Mars.

As its name implies, in character it denotes a robust and rather fighting disposition, a person naturally inclined to rush into dangers and quarrels, and if deeply marked and reddish in colour it increases all indications of accidents and dangers shown on other parts of the hand.

As its name suggests, it represents a strong and somewhat combative nature, someone who is naturally drawn to confront risks and conflicts. If it's significantly marked and has a reddish hue, it amplifies all signs of accidents and dangers indicated on other areas of the hand.

When a branch seems to shoot off from this line and runs on to the Mount of Luna (5-5, Plate X.), it foreshadows restlessness and an intense craving for[Pg 45] excitement. With a weak-looking Line of Mentality it is a sure sign of a craving for drink and intemperance of all kinds, and at the point where it breaks through the Line of Life, it generally indicates death brought on by the intemperance this mark foreshadows.

When a line branches off and extends to the Mount of Luna (5-5, Plate X.), it signals restlessness and a strong desire for[Pg 45] excitement. If the Line of Mentality looks weak, it's a clear sign of a desire for alcohol and various forms of excess, and where it intersects the Line of Life, it often points to death caused by the excess this mark suggests.

Plate X. THE LINE OF LIFE, THE LINE OF MARS, AND OTHER SIGNS. Plate X. THE LINE OF LIFE, THE LINE OF MARS, AND OTHER SIGNS.

It is generally found on short, thick-set square hands or short hands, but when found on a long, thin, and narrow palm, it indicates great vitality and[Pg 46] resistance to disease, a nervous, highly-strung, and rather irritable disposition.

It is usually seen on short, thick square hands or short hands, but when it appears on a long, thin, and narrow palm, it suggests great vitality and[Pg 46] resistance to illness, as well as a nervous, high-strung, and somewhat irritable temperament.

Any broken Life Line with this Line of Mars behind it may indicate great danger of death where the break appears, but a danger that will be overcome through the vitality indicated by this Inner Life Line or Line of Mars.[Pg 47]

Any broken Life Line with this Line of Mars behind it may show a significant danger of death at the point of the break, but it's a danger that can be overcome due to the vitality suggested by this Inner Life Line or Line of Mars.[Pg 47]


CHAPTER V

THE LINE OF DESTINY OR FATE

The Line of Destiny, otherwise called the Line of Fate (1-1, Plate XI.) is naturally one of the most important of the principal lines of the hand.

The Line of Destiny, also known as the Line of Fate (1-1, Plate XI.) is naturally one of the most important of the main lines of the hand.

Although one may never be able to explain why it is, this line undoubtedly appears to indicate at least the main events of one's career.

Although it may be impossible to explain why, this line clearly seems to represent at least the key events of a person's career.

It may be found on the hand even at the moment of birth, clearly indicating the class of Fate or Destiny that lies in the far distant future before the individual.

It can be seen on the hand right from the moment of birth, clearly showing the type of Fate or Destiny that lies far ahead in the individual's future.

In some cases it may look faint or shadowy, as if the path of Destiny were not yet clearly defined, while in other instances almost every step of the road is chiselled out with its milestones of failure or success, sorrow or joy, as the case may be.

In some cases, it might appear faint or shadowy, as if the path of Destiny isn’t completely clear yet, while in other instances, nearly every step of the road is marked with milestones of failure or success, sorrow or joy, depending on the situation.

That some human beings seem to be more children of Fate than others has been admitted by almost all thinkers, but why they should be so has been the great question that baffles all students of such subjects.

That some people seem to be more at the mercy of Fate than others is something nearly all thinkers agree on, but the reason why that is the case has been the big question that puzzles everyone studying these topics.

There are some who appear to have no Fate, and others who seem to carve their Destiny from day to day.

There are some people who seem to have no fate, while others seem to shape their destiny every single day.

I have seen hundreds of cases where every step of the journey was indicated from childhood to the[Pg 48] grave; others where only the principal changes in the career were marked in advance. There are, again, others where nothing seemed decided, and where the events indicated by the Line of Fate appeared to change from year to year.

I’ve seen hundreds of cases where every step of the journey was mapped out from childhood to the[Pg 48] grave; others where only the main changes in a person's life were marked ahead of time. Then there are cases where nothing seemed set in stone, and the events shown by the Line of Fate seemed to shift from year to year.

The why and wherefore of such things may be impossible to fathom, but there are so many mysteries in Life itself that one more or less does not seem to matter.

The reasons behind things like this might be impossible to understand, but there are so many mysteries in Life itself that adding one more doesn't really make a difference.

Some of the greatest teachers and philosophers have come to the conclusion that Fate exists for all. In the 17th Article of Religion in the Episcopal Church it is stated, and in no uncertain manner, that "Predestination to life is the everlasting purpose of God." All through the Bible the Destiny of nations and of men is clearly laid down, and from the first chapter of Genesis to the last page of Revelation the trials, tribulations, and pathway of the Jews was prophesied and predicted ages in advance.

Some of the greatest teachers and philosophers have concluded that Fate exists for everyone. In the 17th Article of Religion in the Episcopal Church, it clearly states that "Predestination to life is the everlasting purpose of God." Throughout the Bible, the Destiny of nations and individuals is clearly outlined, and from the first chapter of Genesis to the last page of Revelation, the challenges, struggles, and journey of the Jews were prophesied and predicted long before.

Thousands of years before the birth of Christ, it was foretold in Holy Writ in what manner He should be born, and in what manner He should die. It was predicted that a Virgin should conceive and that a Judas should betray, and that both were necessary "that the Scriptures might be fulfilled."

Thousands of years before Christ was born, it was written in the Scriptures how He would be born and how He would die. It was predicted that a Virgin would conceive and that Judas would betray Him, and both were essential "for the Scriptures to be fulfilled."

In more recent ages thousands and thousands of predictions have been fulfilled, and all point to some mysterious agency that underlies the purpose of humanity, and that nothing from the smallest to the greatest is left to blind chance.

In recent times, thousands and thousands of predictions have come true, all pointing to some mysterious force that underlies human purpose, showing that nothing, from the smallest to the greatest, is left to random chance.

It may be that the Soul—in being part of the Universal Soul of all things—knows all things, and so through the instrumentality of the brain writes its knowledge of the Future in advance.[Pg 49]

It’s possible that the Soul, being a part of the Universal Soul of everything, knows everything, and that through the brain, it records its knowledge of the Future ahead of time.[Pg 49]

To the mysteries of the mind there are no limits. Medical science has, in late years, gone so far as to prove that there must be an advance growth or change in the brain cells years before action or change in character become the result of such development. For all we know, every deed in our careers is the result of some such mental change, and as there are more super-sensitive nerves from the brain to the hand, it may then follow that such changes and subsequent actions in our lives may be written in our hands even long years in advance.

To the mysteries of the mind, there are no limits. Recent advances in medical science have shown that there is often a growth or change in brain cells that occurs years before any actions or changes in character appear as a result. For all we know, every action in our lives is the outcome of such mental changes, and since there are more sensitive nerves connecting the brain to the hand, it's possible that these changes and the actions that follow may be reflected in our hands long before they actually happen.

It may be, then, that to all living beings there is a Destiny "that shapes our ends, rough hew them as we will."

It may be, then, that for all living beings, there is a Destiny "that shapes our ends, no matter how much we try to change them."

I would, however, humbly suggest that each of us endeavour by knowledge to find what our Fate may be, and like loyal workmen accept whatever the task should prove, and so carry it out to the utmost of our ability, willing to leave the final result to the Master that thought fit to employ us in the working out of His design.

I would, however, humbly suggest that each of us try to discover what our Fate is through knowledge, and like loyal workers, accept whatever the task may be, and carry it out to the best of our ability, ready to leave the final result to the Master who chose to employ us in His plan.

All such questions as these the student of this subject must settle in his own mind, for when he or she once broaches this study of Fate, he will be assailed on all sides, and the student must be prepared to give "an answer for the faith that is in him."

All questions like these the student of this subject must resolve for themselves, because once he or she starts exploring this study of Fate, they will be challenged from all directions, and the student must be ready to provide "an answer for the faith that is in him."

In studying the hand it will be found that the Line of Fate may rise from the following distinct positions:

In studying the hand, you'll find that the Line of Fate can originate from the following different positions:

It may rise from and out of the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), straight up from the wrist (1-1, Plate XI.), from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, Plate XI.), or from the middle of the palm.

It might emerge from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), directly from the wrist (1-1, Plate XI.), from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, Plate XI.), or from the center of the palm.

The following is the meaning of these principal positions:[Pg 50]

The following explains the meaning of these main positions:[Pg 50]

RISING FROM THE LINE OF LIFE

Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), the subject's success will be made by personal effort and merit; the early years of such a Fate will be cramped and difficult; circumstances and the early surroundings will not be favourable, and such people will be greatly hampered or sacrificed to the wishes and plans of their parents or relatives. If the Line of Fate, however, should run on clear and strong from where it leaves the Line of Life, then the subject will overcome all such difficulties and win success by his own personal effort and merit, and not depend on what is termed luck at any time in the career.

Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XI.), a person's success will come from their own hard work and skills; their early years will be tough and challenging. The circumstances and environment won’t be supportive, and these individuals will often feel constrained or sacrificed to the desires and plans of their parents or relatives. However, if the Line of Fate runs clear and strong from the point it leaves the Line of Life, then the person will overcome all these challenges and achieve success through their own effort and merit, without relying on what is typically called luck at any point in their journey.

Another striking and important point is that the date or years marked on the Line of Fate of such a breaking out into the palm, will be found to coincide with the year in the subject's life in which he asserted his independence or launched out into what he more particularly wanted to do. (See also end of chapter on Time, page 112.)

Another notable and important point is that the dates or years marked on the Line of Fate, which break out into the palm, will align with the year in the person's life when they asserted their independence or pursued what they truly wanted to do. (See also the end of the chapter on Time, page 112.)

In any case this date as indicated will be found to be one of the most important in his career.[1]

In any case, this date will turn out to be one of the most important in his career.[1]

[1] For how to obtain dates and years see Chapter XIX.

[1] For information on how to get dates and years see Chapter XIX.

RISING FROM THE WRIST

When the Line of Fate rises from the Wrist (1-1, Plate XI.) and goes straight up the centre of the palm to the Mount of Saturn, provided at the same time the Line of Sun (4-4, Plate XI.) is found well marked, luck, brilliance, and success will attend the Destiny, and extreme good fortune may be anticipated.[Pg 51]

When the Line of Fate starts from the wrist (1-1, Plate XI.) and travels straight up the center of the palm to the Mount of Saturn, as long as the Line of Sun (4-4, Plate XI.) is clearly defined, luck, success, and brilliance will follow your destiny, and you can expect remarkable good fortune.[Pg 51]

RISING FROM THE MOUNT OF THE MOON

Rising from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, Plate XI.) the Fate will be more eventful, changeable, and largely depending on the fancy and caprice of other people.

Rising from the Mount of the Moon (3-3, Plate XI.) the Fate will be more eventful, changeable, and largely depending on the fancy and caprice of other people.

Plate XI. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS. Plate XI. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS CHANGES.

If such a line be found joining the Line of Heart (1-1, Plate XII.), it foretells a happy and prosperous marriage, but one in which idealism, romance, and some fortunate circumstances play their rôle, and[Pg 52] one which results more from the caprice or fancy of the person of the other sex.

If a line connects to the Line of Heart (1-1, Plate XII.), it indicates a happy and successful marriage, but one where idealism, romance, and some lucky circumstances are involved, and[Pg 52] it mainly happens due to the whims or preferences of the other person.

If the Line of Fate be itself straight but with a line running in and joining it from the Mount of the Moon (5-5, Plate XI.), it indicates that the influence of some outside person has helped the subject's Fate, and it is generally an indication of the influence of another sex to the one on whose hand it appears.

If the Line of Fate is straight but has a line coming in and connecting from the Mount of the Moon (5-5, Plate XI.), it suggests that someone outside has positively affected the person's Fate, usually indicating the influence of the opposite sex on the person whose hand it appears on.

When this line of influence from the Mount of the Moon does not, however, blend with the Fate Line (2-2, Plate XII.), it denotes that the other person's life will always remain distinct, and the influence will last only for the length of time that it runs by the side of the subject's Fate.

When this influence from the Mount of the Moon doesn’t connect with the Fate Line (2-2, Plate XII.), it suggests that the other person’s life will always be separate, and the influence will only last for as long as it aligns with the subject’s Fate.

When this influence line cuts the Line of Fate and, leaving it, travels on for some distance towards the Mount of Jupiter (3-3, Plate XII.) it tells that the person whose influence it denotes will only be attracted to the subject by personal ambition—that this person will use the subject for the furthering of his own aims and ambitions, and will desert the subject when she is of no further use. This is more commonly seen on the hand of a woman than on that of a man.

When this influence line crosses the Line of Fate and continues on for some distance toward the Mount of Jupiter (3-3, Plate XII.) it indicates that the person represented by this influence will only be drawn to the subject out of personal ambition—that this person will use the subject to advance their own goals and will abandon the subject once they’ve served their purpose. This is more often seen on a woman's hand than on a man's.

If the Line of Fate ascending the hand sends an offshoot from it on or towards any of the Mounts, such as to Jupiter, the Sun, or Mercury, then the Destiny will be more largely associated with the quality that the Mount it approaches symbolises.

If the Line of Fate rising on the hand branches off towards any of the Mounts, such as Jupiter, the Sun, or Mercury, then Destiny will be more closely connected to the quality that the Mount represents.

For example: If such a line be seen approaching or going towards Jupiter (6-6, Plate XI.) it denotes responsibility, power of command over others, or some high position which will commence to be realised from the date when the offshoot leaves the Line of Fate. If such a mark continues its course and finishes[Pg 53] on the Mount of Jupiter, it is one of the most magnificent signs of success that can be found for that particular aim or purpose.

For example: If such a line is seen coming toward or moving away from Jupiter (6-6, Plate XI.) it indicates responsibility, the ability to lead others, or a significant role that will start to materialize from the moment the branch leaves the Line of Fate. If that mark continues on and ends[Pg 53] on the Mount of Jupiter, it is one of the most outstanding signs of success that can be found for that specific goal or objective.

Plate XII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS VARIATIONS. Plate XII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS VARIATIONS.

If this offshoot ascends towards the Mount of the Sun (7-7, Plate XI.) the success will be in the direction of riches and public life, which will give great publicity or renown; this is also a magnificent sign of success.

If this branch rises toward the Mount of the Sun (7-7, Plate XI), the outcome will lead to wealth and a prominent public life, bringing significant recognition or fame; this is also a wonderful indication of success.

If the offshoot goes towards the Mount of Mercury (8-8, Plate XI.), the success it indicates will be more[Pg 54] in the direction of some special achievement either in science or commerce.

If the offshoot goes towards the Mount of Mercury (8-8, Plate XI.), the success it suggests will be more[Pg 54] focused on a specific achievement in either science or business.

If the Line of Fate itself should not ascend towards its habitual position on the Mount of Saturn, but, instead, run up towards or on to any other Mount, then the whole effort of the life will be tinged with whatever quality that particular Mount signifies. Such an indication must not, however, be considered as the certain or sure sign of success as when the Line of Fate keeps to its own place and sends branches to some particular Mount.

If the Line of Fate doesn't rise to its usual spot on the Mount of Saturn, but instead goes up towards or onto any other Mount, then the entire course of life will be influenced by the traits associated with that Mount. However, this should not be seen as a definite indication of success, unlike when the Line of Fate stays in its proper position and extends branches to a specific Mount.

When the Line of Fate ascends the hand without branches and runs like a lonely path up and on to the Mount of Saturn, such a person will be like a child of Fate chained to an iron road of circumstances. It will be impossible for him to avert the trials of his Destiny or mitigate them in any way. He will receive no help from others, and little will ever happen except to bring him sorrow or tragedy. Such a mark of Fate through the hand must never be considered as "a good line of Destiny."

When the Line of Fate rises on the hand without any branches and stretches like a solitary path up to the Mount of Saturn, that person will feel like a child of Fate bound to a rigid road of circumstances. They won’t be able to avoid the challenges of their Destiny or lessen them in any way. They will get no support from others, and little will occur except to bring them grief or misfortune. Such a mark of Fate on the hand should never be viewed as "a positive line of Destiny."

To have a really good Line of Fate it should not be too heavily marked, but just clear and distinct, and, above all, be accompanied by a Line of Sun in some form or other.

To have a really good Line of Fate, it shouldn’t be overly marked, but rather clear and distinct, and, most importantly, it should be accompanied by a Line of Sun in some form.

If a Line of Fate run over the Mount of Saturn and up into the base of the finger, it is an unfortunate sign, as everything the subject undertakes will get out of his control, and he will not apparently know how or when to stop in whatever he takes up.

If a Line of Fate runs over the Mount of Saturn and up into the base of the finger, it's a bad sign, as everything the person tries will be out of their control, and they won't seem to know how or when to stop whatever they start.

When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Heart, the career will always be ruined through or by the affections being badly placed.

When the Line of Fate seems to be blocked by the Line of Heart, the career will always be harmed due to misplaced affections.

When, however, it joins the Line of Heart and they[Pg 55] together ascend the Mount of Jupiter (1-1, Plate XII.), the subject will have happiness through his affections and will be helped by love and affection to attain his highest ambitions. He will also be extremely lucky through the friendship and love of those he meets, and will be greatly benefited and helped by others.

When it connects with the Line of Heart and they[Pg 55] both climb the Mount of Jupiter (1-1, Plate XII.), the person will find happiness through their feelings and will be supported by love and affection to reach their greatest goals. They will also be very fortunate thanks to the friendships and love of people they encounter, and will receive significant help and support from others.

When the Line of Fate appears to be stopped by the Line of Head (4-4, Plate XII.), it foretells that his career will be spoiled by the subject's own stupidity or mental foolishness.

When the Line of Fate seems to be blocked by the Line of Head (4-4, Plate XII.), it predicts that the person's career will be ruined by their own ignorance or mental foolishness.

RISING FROM THE MIDDLE OF THE PALM

When the Line of Fate only makes its appearance far up in the centre of the palm, in what is called the Plain of Mars, it indicates a hard early life and that the subject must always have a hard fight to gain his ends; but should the Line ascend clearly and strongly from the Plain of Mars and have a branch to or on towards the Mount of the Sun, such a person will be the architect of his own fortunes, and without help or assistance will win success and fortune by his own personal hard work and merit.

When the Line of Fate shows up high in the center of the palm, in an area known as the Plain of Mars, it suggests a difficult early life and that the person will always have to struggle to achieve their goals. However, if the Line rises clearly and strongly from the Plain of Mars and branches toward the Mount of the Sun, that person will be the architect of their own success, and through their own hard work and merit, they will achieve success and prosperity without needing help from others.

When the Line of Fate rises from the Line of Head and when it is well marked, everything will come to the subject late in life and only then by his own brains.

When the Line of Fate starts from the Line of Head and is clearly defined, everything will come to the person later in life and only then through their own intellect.

When the Line of Fate is seen with one branch on the Mount of Venus and the other on the Mount of the Moon (1-2, Plate XIII.) it indicates a career of romance and passion, by which the whole of the Destiny will be swayed.

When the Line of Fate has one branch on the Mount of Venus and the other on the Mount of the Moon (1-2, Plate XIII.) it suggests a career filled with romance and passion, influencing the entire course of one's Destiny.

When the Line of Fate itself rises inside the Life[Pg 56] Line on the Mount of Venus (2-2, Plate XIII.), passionate love will affect the whole career, and such persons, it will be found, usually place their affections on impossible people or on those who are in some way tied up by marriage or who otherwise are unable to gratify the love that the other person demands. This is a most unlucky sign for affection to find in the hands of a woman.

When the Line of Fate appears within the Life[Pg 56] Line on the Mount of Venus (2-2, Plate XIII.), passionate love will impact the entire career, and it is often seen that these individuals tend to develop feelings for unattainable people or for those who are somehow bound by marriage or who cannot fulfill the love that the other person seeks. This is a very unfortunate sign for a woman to have in terms of affection.

Plate XIII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS MODIFICATIONS. Plate XIII. THE LINE OF DESTINY AND ITS CHANGES.

When the Line of Fate is broken or made up in little bits, the career will be found full of troubles, breaks,[Pg 57] and nothing that one gets will last long enough to bring any settled or continuous success.

When the Line of Fate is broken or fragmented, the career will be filled with difficulties, setbacks, and nothing achieved will last long enough to lead to any stable or ongoing success.[Pg 57]

A break in the Fate Line is not always a bad sign to have, provided that one side begins before the other ends; in such a case it foretells a complete change in surroundings and position, and if the new line looks good and straight it will be found to mean that the change will bring about an advancement in position commencing at the date when the second line first makes its appearance.[2]

A break in the Fate Line isn't always a bad sign, especially if one side starts before the other ends. In that case, it suggests a complete change in your surroundings and situation. If the new line looks good and straight, it means that the change will lead to an improvement in your position starting from the date when the second line first appears.[2]

[2] For dates on the Line of Fate see Chapter XIX.

[2] For dates on the Line of Fate see Chapter XIX.

INFLUENCE LINES

When any small line joins the Fate Line or goes on with it as an attendant line, such a mark usually indicates marriage at the date when these lines join (3-3, Plate XIII.). If, on the contrary, these lines do not join, marriage with the person is not likely to occur although the affection and influence will be present in the career.

When any small line connects with the Fate Line or continues along with it as a supporting line, this typically suggests marriage at the time these lines connect (3-3, Plate XIII.). Conversely, if these lines do not connect, marriage with that person is unlikely, although feelings and influence will still be part of the career.

When one of these influence lines appears by the side of the Fate Line and crosses through it towards or on to the Mount of Mars, it indicates that the influence thus shown will turn to hate and will injure the career of the person on whose hand it is found (1-1, Plate XIV.).

When one of these influence lines appears next to the Fate Line and crosses through it toward or onto the Mount of Mars, it means that the influence indicated will turn to hate and will harm the career of the person whose hand it is found on (1-1, Plate XIV.).

DOUBLE LINES OF FATE

When the Line of Fate is itself double (2-2, Plate XIV.), it is a sign of what is called "a double life," but if, after running side by side for some length[Pg 58] these two lines join or become one, it foretells that "the double life" has been caused by some great affection, that circumstances prevented a union, but that the preventing cause will be removed at the point where these two lines join.

When the Line of Fate is double (2-2, Plate XIV.), it indicates what is known as "a double life." However, if these two lines run parallel for a while[Pg 58] and then merge into one, it suggests that "the double life" was caused by a deep affection, and that circumstances had kept them apart, but the reason for their separation will be resolved at the point where the lines connect.

When, however, a double Line of Fate is clearly marked, especially if they incline towards different mounts of the hand, such a mark indicates that two careers would be carried out simultaneously—one perhaps as a hobby and the other as the principal career.

When a double Line of Fate is clearly visible, especially if they lean towards different areas of the hand, it suggests that two careers will be pursued at the same time—one possibly as a hobby and the other as the main career.

When the Line of Fate is extremely faint or just barely traced through the palm, it will be found to indicate a general disbelief in the idea of Fate and Destiny. It is often found on the hands of very materialistic persons, those who rebel against the idea that they are governed in any way by Fate or by any power save themselves.

When the Line of Fate is very faint or only lightly marked on the palm, it usually shows a general skepticism towards the concept of Fate and Destiny. It's often seen on the hands of very materialistic people, those who reject the notion that they are influenced by Fate or any power other than themselves.

When this is found, and at the same time a good clear Line of Head, such people will be sure to win success by their mentality alone, but the details of their destiny will not be able to be told, and one must content oneself with chiefly describing their characteristics, peculiarities, etc.

When this is found, and at the same time a clear Line of Head, these people are sure to achieve success through their mentality alone, but the specifics of their destiny cannot be revealed, and one must be satisfied with mainly describing their traits, quirks, etc.

When no Line of Fate whatever is found and only a very ordinary Line of Head, then there will be nothing very particular to say about the Destiny; such people, as a rule, lead very colourless lives, nothing seems to affect them much one way or the other, and they will be found to have very little purpose to illumine the drab monotony of their existence.

When there’s no Line of Fate and only a basic Line of Head, there isn’t much to say about Destiny; people like this usually lead pretty bland lives, not much seems to impact them either way, and they often lack a clear purpose to brighten the dull routine of their existence.

An island (3, Plate XIV.) is an extremely bad sign to find in the Line of Fate.

An island (3, Plate XIV.) is a very negative indication to see in the Line of Fate.

When found at the very beginning of the line (4,[Pg 59] Plate XIV.) it indicates some mystery regarding the commencement of such careers, such as illegitimate birth.

When seen at the very start of the line (4,[Pg 59] Plate XIV.) it suggests some mystery about the beginnings of these careers, like being born out of wedlock.

Plate XIV. THE LINE OF DESTINY, ISLANDS, AND OTHER SIGNS. Plate XIV. THE LINE OF DESTINY, ISLANDS, AND OTHER SYMBOLS.

An island, when found on a woman's hand connecting the Fate Line with the Mount of Venus, is an almost certain indication of her seduction (5, Plate XIV.).

An island, when seen on a woman’s hand linking the Fate Line with the Mount of Venus, is a strong sign of her seduction (5, Plate XIV.).

An island in any part of the Plain of Mars indicates a period of great difficulty, loss in one's career, and[Pg 60] in consequence, generally loss of money (3, Plate XIV.).

An island anywhere in the Plain of Mars signals a time of significant struggle, setbacks in one's career, and[Pg 60] as a result, usually a loss of money (3, Plate XIV.).

An Island on the Fate and Head Lines together means loss also, but more brought on by the person's own stupidity or lack of intelligence (6, Plate XIV.).

An Island on the Fate and Head Lines also indicates loss, but it's primarily caused by the person's own foolishness or lack of judgment (6, Plate XIV.).

An island over the Fate and Heart Lines indicates loss and trouble connected with affairs of the heart or brought about by the affections.

An island on the Fate and Heart Lines suggests loss and issues related to love or caused by emotions.

An island on the Mount of Saturn or towards the end of the Line of Fate (5, Plate XIV.) foreshadows that the career will finish in poverty and despair.[3]

An island on the Mount of Saturn or near the end of the Line of Fate (5, Plate XIV.) suggests that the career will end in poverty and despair.[3]

[3] For more details concerning the meaning of "islands" in general, see Chapter XV.

[3] For more information about the meaning of "islands" in general, see Chapter XV.

When the Line of Fate finishes suddenly with a cross, some great fatality may be expected, but when the cross is found on the Fate Line and on the Mount of Saturn, the ending of such a Destiny will be some terrible tragedy, generally one of public disgrace and public death.[Pg 61]

When the Line of Fate ends abruptly with a cross, it usually signals a major disaster ahead. However, if the cross appears on the Fate Line and the Mount of Saturn, it indicates that the conclusion of such a Destiny will involve a severe tragedy, typically one marked by public shame and a tragic death.[Pg 61]


CHAPTER VI

THE LINE OF THE SUN

The Line of the Sun, which is otherwise called the Line of Success or the Line of Brilliancy (1-1, Plate XV.), is one of the most important marks on the hand to consider.

The Line of the Sun, also known as the Line of Success or the Line of Brilliance (1-1, Plate XV.), is one of the key features on the hand to pay attention to.

It has in its symbolism almost the same significance as the Sun itself has to the Earth.

It has almost the same symbolic significance as the Sun does to the Earth.

Without this line the life has no happiness, no sunshine, as it were, and even the greatest talents lie in darkness and do not produce their fruit.

Without this line, life has no happiness, no sunshine, and even the greatest talents remain in darkness and fail to bear fruit.

Amateurs, in looking at hands, often make the greatest mistakes in seeing what appears to be "a good Line of Fate," and in consequence rush off and predict great success and fortune, whereas, as I explained in the preceding chapter, a Fate Line unaccompanied by the Line of Sun may simply mean a fatalistic life full of sorrow and darkness.

Amateurs, when examining hands, frequently make the biggest errors by interpreting what seems to be "a good Line of Fate," and as a result, they hastily predict great success and wealth. However, as I explained in the previous chapter, a Fate Line without the Line of Sun may just indicate a life that is fatalistic and filled with sorrow and darkness.

The quality that the Line of Sun denotes is, what is generally called "luck"; with a well-marked Sun Line even a poor Line of Head promises more success, and it is the same with the Line of Fate.

The quality that the Line of Sun represents is what is commonly referred to as "luck"; with a clearly defined Sun Line, even a weak Line of Head suggests more success, and the same applies to the Line of Fate.

People with the Sun Line appear to have more magnetism, more influence over others. They more easily secure recognition, reward, riches, and honours.

People with the Sun Line seem to have more charm and greater influence over others. They more easily gain recognition, rewards, wealth, and honors.

They also have a happier and brighter disposition,[Pg 62] and this has naturally a great deal to do with what is called success.

They also have a happier and more optimistic attitude,[Pg 62] and this clearly has a lot to do with what we call success.

Plate XV. THE LINE OF SUN AND ITS MODIFICATIONS. Plate XV. THE SUN'S PATH AND ITS CHANGES.

From whatever date in the hand the Line of Sun appears, things become brighter, more prosperous and important. The Line of the Sun may rise from the following positions:

From any date in the hand that the Line of Sun appears, things get brighter, more successful, and significant. The Line of the Sun can originate from the following positions:

From the Line of Life, the Line of Fate, the Plain of[Pg 63] Mars, the Mount of the Moon, the Line of Head, and from the Line of Heart, or it may only appear as a small line on its own Mount.

From the Line of Life, the Line of Fate, the Plain of[Pg 63] Mars, the Mount of the Moon, the Line of Head, and from the Line of Heart, or it might just show up as a small line on its own Mount.

Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XV.), it promises success from whatever the life is that is led, but not from "luck."

Rising from the Line of Life (2-2, Plate XV.), it guarantees success from any life that is lived, but not from "luck."

From the Line of Fate (3-3, Plate XV.), it is a sure sign of recognition for the career adopted, but brought about by the personal effort of the subject.

From the Line of Fate (3-3, Plate XV.), it’s a clear indication of acknowledgment for the chosen career, but it is achieved through the individual’s own effort.

From the Plain of Mars, and not connected with the other lines, it foretells success after difficulties.

From the Plain of Mars, and not linked to the other lines, it predicts success after challenges.

From the Mount of the Moon (4-4, Plate XV.), success is more a matter due to the caprice of others. It is more changeable and uncertain and is by no means such a sure sign of riches or solid position. It is more the sign of success as a public favourite, and is often found in the hands of those who depend on the public for their livelihood, such as actors and actresses, singers, and certain classes of artists, speakers, clergymen, etc. For all such professions it is, however, fortunate, and an extremely lucky sign to have, as it promises in all cases luck, brilliancy, and recognition in the world.

From the Mount of the Moon (4-4, Plate XV.), success relies more on the whims of others. It's more unpredictable and uncertain, and it's definitely not a guaranteed indicator of wealth or a stable position. Instead, it reflects success as a public favorite, often held by those who rely on the public for their income, like actors, singers, certain types of artists, speakers, clergymen, and so on. For all these professions, it is, however, a fortunate and very lucky sign to have, as it promises luck, brilliance, and recognition in life.

Rising from the Line of Head, the Sun Line gives success from the mental efforts and qualities, but not until after the middle of life is past. It is found on the hands of brain workers, students of some particular branch of study, writers, scientists, etc.

Rising from the Line of Head, the Sun Line indicates success from mental efforts and qualities, but only after the mid-point of life. It's seen on the hands of intellectuals, students of specific fields, writers, scientists, and similar professions.

From the Line of Heart, success will come late in life in some way depending on, or through, the affections. In such cases it generally promises a very happy marriage late in life, but it is always a certain sign of eventual ease, happiness, and worldly comfort.[Pg 64]

From the Line of Heart, success will arrive later in life in some way, influenced by or through relationships. In these cases, it usually indicates a very happy marriage later in life, but it always signifies eventual ease, happiness, and financial stability.[Pg 64]

Marked only on its own Mount, the Line of Sun promises happiness and success, but so late in life as to make it hardly worth having.

Marked only on its own Mount, the Line of Sun promises happiness and success, but so late in life that it hardly seems worth having.

When the third finger—called the finger of the Sun—is much longer than the first with the Line of Sun well marked, the gambling instincts will be much in evidence. Nearly all successful gamblers for money have these two indications.

When the third finger—known as the finger of the Sun—is significantly longer than the first and the Line of Sun is clearly defined, the gambling instincts will be quite strong. Almost all successful gamblers tend to have these two signs.

When, however, the third finger is equal to the second, the love of amassing wealth will be the dominant passion of the life.

When the third finger is the same length as the second, the desire to accumulate wealth will be the main passion in life.

When the third finger is extremely long and twisted or crooked, the person will endeavour to obtain money at any cost. This malformation is much seen in the hands of thieves or criminals who are likely to commit any crime for the sake of money. Note—if the Line of Head is very high on the palm, and more especially if it rises upwards at the end (3-3, Plate III.), these evil qualities will be still more accentuated.

When the third finger is very long and bent or crooked, the person will try to get money by any means necessary. This deformity is often seen in the hands of thieves or criminals who are willing to commit any crime for money. Note—if the Line of Head is very high on the palm, especially if it rises upwards at the end (3-3, Plate III.), these negative traits will be even more pronounced.

When a hand is found to be artistic in its shape, with pointed fingers or long and narrow, the Line of Sun on such a formation promises rather success and brilliancy in Art, on the Stage, or in Public Singing, than in anything else.

When a hand has an artistic shape, with pointed or long, narrow fingers, the Line of Sun on that hand suggests more success and brilliance in art, on stage, or in public singing, rather than in anything else.

The real musician's hand, such as the composer's or player's, is however rarely a long, thin-shaped hand, because such persons must have a more scientific nature. This quality is not found with those who possess the long, slender, very artistic-shaped hand, who depend more on their emotional temperament than on scientific study for their foundation.

The true musician's hand, like that of a composer or performer, is rarely long and thin because those individuals need to have a more analytical approach. This trait isn't typically found in those with long, slender, highly artistic hands, as they rely more on their emotional temperament than on scientific knowledge as their base.

On extremely long, thin hands, those that belong to what is called the Psychic Type,[4] the Line of Sun[Pg 65] has very little meaning except that of temperament, such persons being too idealistic to care for either wealth, position, or worldly success. They have as a rule, simply bright, happy, sunny dispositions if this line is marked on their hands, and they go through life as in a dream, and their dreams are to them the only things that matter.

On extremely long, slender hands, which are typical of what is known as the Psychic Type,[4] the Line of Sun[Pg 65] holds very little significance beyond indicating temperament. These individuals tend to be too idealistic to care about wealth, status, or worldly success. Generally, if this line is prominent on their hands, they have bright, happy, sunny personalities, living life as if in a dream, with their dreams being the only things that truly matter to them.

[4] See Types of Hands, Part II., page 123.

[4] Refer to Types of Hands, Part II, page 123.

A curious characteristic, however, and one that has not been noticed by other writers on this subject, is, that on all hands where the Sun Line is seen, the nature of such people is much more sensitive to environment than that of those persons who do not possess this Line. For this reason the Line has been considered a sign of the artistic nature. But what is known as the "artistic nature" may show itself only in the love of beautiful things, harmony of surroundings, and such like; whereas the people who do not possess any mark of the Sun Line, seldom even notice their surroundings and would live equally happy in the most squalid homes. They would not trouble whether their curtains were black, green, yellow, or some fearful conglomeration of all three.

One interesting aspect that hasn’t been pointed out by other writers on this topic is that, everywhere the Sun Line appears, the people with this characteristic are much more sensitive to their surroundings than those without it. Because of this, the Line has been seen as a sign of artistic temperament. However, what we refer to as the "artistic temperament" may only manifest as a love for beautiful things, harmony in their environment, and similar preferences; on the other hand, people without the Sun Line rarely pay attention to their surroundings and can be just as happy living in the most run-down places. They wouldn't care whether their curtains were black, green, yellow, or a disturbing mix of all three.

When many lines are found on the Mount of the Sun, they show also the artistic nature, but one where the multiplicity of aims and ideas will prevent any real success.

When many lines are found on the Mount of the Sun, they also reveal an artistic quality, but the variety of goals and concepts will hinder any real achievement.

Two or three Sun Lines, when running parallel and evenly together, are good and indicate success in two or three different lines of work; but one good, straight, clear line is the best sign to have.

Two or three Sun Lines, when running parallel and evenly together, are good and indicate success in two or three different fields of work; but one strong, clear line is the best sign to have.

An "island" on any part of the Line of the Sun destroys the position and success promised, but only during the period where the island appears (5, Plate XV.). In nearly all cases it denotes public scandal,[Pg 66] and when very clearly marked a cause célèbre or something of that sort.

An "island" at any point on the Line of the Sun undermines the promised position and success, but only for the time that the island is visible (5, Plate XV.). In almost all cases, it signifies public scandal,[Pg 66] and when it's very clearly defined, it indicates a cause célèbre or something similar.

All opposition lines, viz., those that cross over from the thumb side of the hand, and especially those from the Mount of Mars or from its direction, are bad (6-6 Plate XV.). If these opposition lines pass through, cut, or interfere with the Line of Sun in any way, they denote the jealousy or interference of people against one.

All opposition lines, which are the ones that cross over from the thumb side of the hand, especially those from the Mount of Mars or in that direction, are negative (6-6 Plate XV.). If these opposition lines cross or disrupt the Line of Sun in any way, they indicate jealousy or interference from others.

Curiously enough, these opposition lines from the Mount of Mars relate to the interference of members of the same sex as the subject; while, if they come from the Mount of Venus, they relate to the opposite sex of the individual on whose hand they appear (7-7, Plate XV.).

Curiously enough, these opposing lines from the Mount of Mars refer to the interference of members of the same sex as the person in question; whereas, if they originate from the Mount of Venus, they pertain to the opposite sex of the individual whose hand they are found on (7-7, Plate XV.).

A "star" found on the Line of Sun is one of the luckiest and most fortunate signs to have.

A "star" found on the Line of Sun is one of the luckiest and most fortunate signs to have.

A "square" is a sign of preservation against the attacks of enemies or efforts to assail one's position.

A "square" is a symbol of protection against enemy attacks or attempts to undermine one's position.

A "cross" is an unfortunate sign, and denotes difficulties and annoyance, but only relating to one's name or position.

A "cross" is an unlucky symbol, indicating challenges and frustration, but only in connection to one's name or status.

On a "hollow hand," the Line of Sun loses all power, and its good promises are never fulfilled.

On a "hollow hand," the Line of Sun loses all its power, and its good promises are never kept.

The complete absence of the Line of Sun on an otherwise well-marked hand, indicates that no matter how clever or talented these people may be, the recognition of the world will be difficult or even impossible to gain. In other words, their life will remain in darkness; people will not see their work and the "Sun of Success" will never dawn on their pathway of labour.[Pg 67]

The total lack of the Line of Sun on an otherwise clearly marked hand means that, no matter how smart or skilled these individuals are, getting recognition in the world will be tough or even impossible. In other words, their lives will stay in the shadows; people won't notice their efforts, and the "Sun of Success" will never rise on their path to accomplishment.[Pg 67]


CHAPTER VII

THE LINE OF HEART AS INDICATING THE AFFECTIONATE AND EMOTIONAL NATURE

The Line of Heart is that Line which runs across the hand under the fingers and generally rises under the base of the first, and runs off the side of the hand under the base of the fourth or little finger (1-1, Plate XVI.).

The Line of Heart is the line that runs across the hand below the fingers, usually starting under the base of the index finger and extending towards the side of the hand below the base of the pinky finger (1-1, Plate XVI.).

The Line of Heart relates purely to the affectionate disposition, in fact, to the mental side of the love nature of the subject. It should be borne in mind that, by lying as it does on that part of the hand above the Line of Head, it is consequently on the portion of the hand that relates to mental characteristics and not to the physical.

The Line of Heart is all about a person's affectionate side; it really reflects the emotional aspect of love for the individual. It's important to remember that since it sits above the Line of Head on the hand, it pertains to mental traits rather than physical ones.

The Line of Heart should be deep, clear, and well coloured. It may arise from the extreme outside of the Mount of Jupiter (2, Plate XVI.), from the centre of this Mount, from the space between the first and second fingers (3, Plate XVI.), from the face of the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate XVI.), or from directly under this Mount (5, Plate XVI.).

The Line of Heart should be deep, clear, and vividly colored. It can start from the outer edge of the Mount of Jupiter (2, Plate XVI.), from the center of this Mount, from the area between the first and second fingers (3, Plate XVI.), from the surface of the Mount of Saturn (4, Plate XVI.), or from directly beneath this Mount (5, Plate XVI.).

From the outside of the Mount of Jupiter, it denotes the blind enthusiast in affection, a man or woman who places his or her ideal of love so high that neither fault nor failing is seen in the being worshipped. With[Pg 68] these people their pride in the object of their affection is beyond all reason, and all such extremists as a rule suffer terribly through their affections.

From the outside of the Mount of Jupiter, it shows the overly passionate lover, someone who holds their ideal of love so high that they can't see any flaws in the person they admire. With[Pg 68] these individuals, their pride in the object of their love is unreasonable, and all such extremists typically experience great suffering because of their feelings.

Plate XVI. THE LINE OF HEART AND ITS VARIATIONS. Plate XVI. THE HEART LINE AND ITS VARIATIONS.

From the centre of the Mount of Jupiter, the Heart Line gives more moderation, but also great ideality, and is one of the best of the variations of this Line that we are about to consider.

From the center of the Mount of Jupiter, the Heart Line offers more balance, but also significant idealism, and is one of the best variations of this Line that we are about to examine.

People with such a Heart Line are firm and reliable in their affections, they have an unusually high code[Pg 69] of honour and morality. They are ambitious that the person they live with be great, noble, and successful. They seldom marry beneath their station in life, and they have fewer love affairs than any other class.

People with this type of Heart Line are steady and dependable in their relationships; they possess a notably high code of honor and morality. They aspire for their partner to be great, noble, and successful. They rarely marry below their social status, and they have fewer romantic relationships than any other group.

If they once really love, they love for ever. They do not believe in second marriages, and the divorce courts are seldom troubled with their presence.

If they truly love once, they love forever. They don't believe in second marriages, and divorce courts rarely see them.

The Heart Line rising from between the first and second fingers, gives a calmer but a very deep nature in all matters of the affections (3, Plate XVI.).

The Heart Line that rises between the first and second fingers indicates a calmer yet very profound nature in all matters of the heart (3, Plate XVI.).

These people seem to strike the happy medium between the ideality and pride given by Jupiter, and the more selfish love nature given when the line rises from Saturn.

These people appear to find a balance between the idealism and pride associated with Jupiter, and the more self-centered love nature that comes from the influence of Saturn.

They are not very demonstrative when in love, but they are capable of the very greatest sacrifices for those they care for. They do not expect the person on whom they bestow their affection to be a god or a goddess.

They aren't very expressive when they're in love, but they're capable of making the biggest sacrifices for the people they care about. They don't expect the person they love to be perfect or divine.

When the Line of Heart rises on the Mount of Saturn the subject will be rather selfish in all questions of affection (4, Plate XVI.). These people are not self-sacrificing, like the previous type. They are inclined to be cynical, reserved, undemonstrative but very insistent in trying to gain the person they want. They will let nothing stand in their way, but once they have obtained their object they show little tenderness or devotion.

When the Line of Heart rises on the Mount of Saturn, the person will be somewhat selfish in matters of love (4, Plate XVI.). These individuals are not self-sacrificing like the previous type. They tend to be cynical, reserved, and not very expressive but are very determined to win over the person they want. They won’t let anything get in their way, but once they have what they desire, they show little affection or loyalty.

They are very unforgiving if they discover any lapses on the part of their partner, but as they are "a law unto themselves," they close their eyes to their own shortcomings.

They are really unforgiving if they find any faults in their partner, but since they consider themselves "a law unto themselves," they ignore their own flaws.

The Line of Heart that rises from under the base of the Mount of Saturn (5, Plate XVI.), exhibits all[Pg 70] the foregoing characteristics, but in a much more intensified form. Such persons live for themselves, and care little whether those around them are happy or not.

The Line of Heart that comes up from the base of the Mount of Saturn (5, Plate XVI.) shows all[Pg 70] the previous traits, but in a much stronger way. These individuals live for themselves and are not very concerned about the happiness of those around them.

The shorter the Line of Heart is on the Hand, the less the higher sentiments of the affection make themselves manifest.

The shorter the Line of Heart is on the hand, the less the deeper feelings of affection are expressed.

When the Line of Heart is found in excess, namely, extremely long—it denotes a terrible tendency toward jealousy (2, Plate XVI.), and this is alarmingly increased if the Line of Head on the same hand is very sloping towards the Mount of the Moon (6, Plate XVI.). In such a case the imagination will run away with itself where jealousy is concerned.

When the Line of Heart is excessively long, it indicates a strong tendency towards jealousy (2, Plate XVI.), and this tendency is alarmingly heightened if the Line of Head on the same hand slopes significantly towards the Mount of the Moon (6, Plate XVI.). In this situation, the imagination can easily spiral out of control when it comes to feelings of jealousy.

When the Line of Heart is found curving downward at the base of the Mount of Jupiter (7, Plate XVI.), it tells of a strange fatality in that person, of meeting with great disappointment in love, and even with those they trust in friendship. He seems to lack perception, in knowing whom to love. His affections are nearly always misplaced or never returned.

When the Line of Heart curves downward at the base of the Mount of Jupiter (7, Plate XVI.), it signifies an unusual destiny for that person, experiencing significant disappointment in love, as well as with those they rely on in friendship. They appear to struggle with understanding whom to love. Their feelings are often misdirected or go unreciprocated.

These people have, however, as a rule, wonderfully kind, affectionate dispositions. They have little pride about whom they love and they generally marry beneath their station in life.

These people usually have incredibly kind and loving personalities. They don't have much pride when it comes to who they love and often marry someone from a lower social status.

A Line of Heart made up like a chain, or by a crowd of little lines running into it, denotes flirtations and inconstancy in the love nature, and seldom has any lasting affection.

A line of the heart that looks like a chain, or is formed by a series of smaller lines connecting to it, indicates flirtations and a lack of stability in love, and usually doesn't represent lasting affection.

A Line of Heart from Saturn in holes or links like a chain, especially when it is broad, denotes an absolute contempt for the subject's opposite sex. It is one of the signs of mental degeneration as far as love is concerned.[Pg 71]

A Line of Heart from Saturn with holes or links like a chain, especially when it is wide, shows a complete disdain for the opposite sex of the person. It is a sign of mental decline regarding love.[Pg 71]

When this Line is pale and broad, without any depth, it denotes a nature blasé and indifferent with no depth of affection.

When this line is pale and wide, without any depth, it indicates a personality that is indifferent and unfeeling, lacking deep affection.

When very low down on the hand, almost touching the Line of Head, the heart will always interfere with the affairs of the head.

When positioned very low on the hand, almost touching the Head Line, the heart will always have an impact on the thoughts and decisions of the mind.

When it lies very high on the hand and the space is narrowed only by the Head Line being abnormally high and out of its place, it indicates the reverse of the above, and that the affairs of the heart are ruled by the head. Such persons are extremely calculating in all matters of love.

When it sits very high on the hand and the space is narrowed just because the Head Line is unusually high and out of position, it suggests the opposite of what was mentioned earlier, indicating that the matters of the heart are governed by the mind. People like this are very strategic in all aspects of love.

When only one deep, straight line is found across the hand from side to side, the two lines both Head and Heart appear to blend together. This denotes an intensely self-concentrated nature. If such a subject loves, he unites with it all the forces of his mind, and if he put his mind on any subject, he throws his whole heart and soul into whatever it may be (Plate VI.).

When there's just one deep, straight line running across the hand from side to side, the Head and Heart lines seem to merge. This indicates a highly self-focused personality. If this person loves, they devote all their mental energy to it, and when they focus on any topic, they invest their entire heart and soul into it (Plate VI.).

These people are also terribly head-strong and self-willed in all they do. They do not seem to know what fear means in any sense—they are dangerous lovers and husbands to trifle with, for they will stop at nothing if their blood is once roused.

These people are also incredibly stubborn and determined in everything they do. They don’t seem to understand what fear is at all—they are risky partners and husbands to mess with, because they won’t hold back once they're provoked.

They are also dangerous to themselves. They rush blindly into danger, and they usually meet with terrible accidents and injuries, and very often suffer a violent death (see also page 29).

They are also a danger to themselves. They rush into risky situations without thinking, and they often end up with terrible accidents and injuries, and many times face a violent death (see also page 29).

When the Line of Heart commences with a fork, one branch on Jupiter and the other between the first and second fingers, it is an excellent sign of a well-balanced, happy, affectionate disposition, and a good promise of great happiness in all matters of affection.[Pg 72]

When the Line of Heart starts with a fork, with one branch pointing to Jupiter and the other between the first and second fingers, it’s a great sign of a well-balanced, happy, affectionate nature and a strong indication of significant happiness in all matters of love.[Pg 72]

When the Line of Heart is very thin and with no branches, it denotes coldness and want of heart.

When the Line of Heart is very thin and has no branches, it indicates coldness and a lack of emotion.

When there is no Line of Heart whatever, it is a sign of a cold-blooded, unemotional nature. Such people can, however, be brutally sensual and especially so if the Mount of Venus is high (see Mounts, page 140).

When there isn't any Line of Heart, it indicates a cold, unemotional personality. However, these individuals can be extremely sensual, especially if the Mount of Venus is prominent (see Mounts, page 140).

A broken Heart Line is a certain sign that some terrible tragedy in the affections will at some time or other overwhelm the subject.

A broken Heart Line is a clear indication that a significant emotional tragedy will eventually affect the person.

It may not often be found nowadays, but I have seen it in some few cases, and these persons never recovered the loss of the loved one or ever had love in their lives again.[Pg 73]

It may be rare these days, but I've seen it happen a few times, and those people never got over the loss of their loved one or experienced love in their lives again.[Pg 73]


CHAPTER VIII

SIGNS RELATING TO MARRIAGE

What is called the Line of Marriage is that mark or marks, as the case may be, found on the side of the Mount under the fourth finger (1, Plate XVII.).

What we refer to as the Line of Marriage is the line or lines, depending on the individual, located on the side of the palm beneath the fourth finger (1, Plate XVII.).

I will first proceed to give all the details possible about these lines, and then call my reader's attention to the other marks on the hand that qualify these Lines of Marriage, and further add a wealth of information regarding them.

I will first provide all the details I can about these lines, and then I will point out to my readers the other markings on the hand that clarify these Lines of Marriage, along with a lot more information about them.

The Line, or Lines, of Marriage may be found as very short marks almost on the very side of the hand, or they may appear as quite long lines rising from the side of the hand into the face of the Mount of Mercury, or, in some cases, going farther still into the hand itself.

The Line, or Lines, of Marriage can be very short marks located near the edge of the hand, or they might show up as longer lines extending from the side of the hand towards the area of the Mount of Mercury. In some instances, they may even extend further into the hand itself.

Only the clearly formed lines relate to marriage, the short ones to deep affection, or marriage contemplated, but never entered into (2, Plate XVII.).

Only the clearly defined lines refer to marriage; the short ones indicate deep affection or marriage that was considered but never actually occurred (2, Plate XVII.).

When the deep line is found lying close to the line of Heart, the marriage will take place early in life, but the other marks I am going to explain later will give more accurate dates as to when the event will occur.

When the deep line is found close to the line of Heart, the marriage will happen early in life, but the other marks I’ll explain later will provide more precise dates for when the event will take place.

For a happy marriage the lines on the Mount of[Pg 74] Mercury should be straight and clear, without breaks or irregularities of any kind (1, Plate XVII.).

For a happy marriage, the lines on the Mount of[Pg 74] Mercury should be straight and clear, with no breaks or irregularities at all (1, Plate XVII.).

Plate XVII. MARRIAGE LINES. THE LINE OF MARRIAGE. Plate XVII. MARRIAGE LINES. THE MARRIAGE LINE.

When the Line of Marriage curves or droops downwards (3, Plate XVII.), the person on whose hand this appears will outlive the other.

When the Line of Marriage bends or dips downward (3, Plate XVII.), the person on whose hand this is seen will live longer than the other.

When the line turns upward in the reverse direction, the possessor is not likely ever to marry (4, Plate XVII.).[Pg 75]

When the line curves upward in the opposite direction, the person is unlikely to ever get married (4, Plate XVII.).[Pg 75]

When the line is clear and distinct, but has a lot of little lines dropping from it, it foreshadows trouble and anxiety in the marriage, but brought on by the delicacy and ill-health of the partner (5, Plate XVII.).

When the line is clear and defined, but has many small lines branching off from it, it suggests trouble and stress in the marriage, stemming from the fragility and poor health of one partner (5, Plate XVII.).

When the line has a curve at the end, and if a cross or line be found cutting into this curve (2, Plate XVIII.), the partner will die by accident or a sudden illness of some kind. But when the Marriage Line ends in a long, gradual curve into the Heart Line, the death of the partner will come about by gradual ill-health or illness of a very long duration.

When the line has a curve at the end, and there's a cross or line cutting into this curve (2, Plate XVIII.), the partner will die from an accident or a sudden illness. However, when the Marriage Line ends in a long, gradual curve into the Heart Line, the partner's death will be due to a long-term illness or gradual health decline.

When the line has an "island" at the beginning, then the marriage will be for a long time delayed, and the two persons will be much separated at the commencement of their married life.

When there’s an "island" at the start of the line, the marriage will be delayed for a long time, and the couple will be quite separated at the beginning of their married life.

When the "island" is found about the middle of the Marriage Line, some great trouble and separation will take place about the middle of the married life (3, Plate XVIII.).

When the "island" is located around the center of the Marriage Line, significant trouble and separation will occur around the midpoint of the marriage (3, Plate XVIII.).

When the "island" is found towards the end of the line, the marriage will most probably end in trouble and separation one from the other.

When the "island" appears near the end of the line, the marriage will likely end in conflict and separation.

When the Line of Marriage divides into the form of a fork (4, Plate XVIII.), the two people will live apart from one another, but when the fork turns downwards towards the Line of Heart a legal separation may be anticipated (5, Plate XVIII.).

When the Line of Marriage splits into a fork (4, Plate XVIII.), it means the two people will live separately. However, if the fork points down towards the Line of Heart, a legal separation might be expected (5, Plate XVIII.).

When this fork is more accentuated, and turns down more into the hand, divorce may be expected, and especially so if one end of this fork stretches across the hand in the direction of the Plain of Mars, or the Mount of Mars (5, Plate XVIII.).

When this fork is more pronounced and turns down more into the hand, a divorce may be anticipated, especially if one end of this fork extends across the hand towards the Plain of Mars or the Mount of Mars (5, Plate XVIII.).

In many cases a fine line may be found crossing the entire palm, from the Marriage Line, and in such a case[Pg 76] the greatest animosity and bitterness will enter into the fight for freedom and divorce. In such an example there is never any hope of reconciliation.

In many cases, a prominent line can be seen crossing the entire palm, starting from the Marriage Line, and in this situation[Pg 76] the deepest animosity and resentment will come into play during the struggle for freedom and divorce. In this example, there is never any hope for reconciliation.

When the Line of Marriage is full of little islands, or linked like the loops of a chain, the subject should be warned not to marry at any time, as such a union would be full of the greatest unhappiness and continual separations.

When the Line of Marriage has lots of little islands or looks like a chain with links, the person should be cautioned against marrying at any point, as that kind of union would lead to significant unhappiness and constant separations.

When the line, which is otherwise well marked, appears about the centre to break in two, it foreshadows a fatality or break-up in an otherwise happy married life.

When the line, which is usually clear, seems to split in two around the middle, it signals a tragedy or a rupture in an otherwise happy marriage.

When the Line of Marriage itself, or an offshoot from it, goes into the hand, and joins or ascends upward with the Line of Sun, it promises that its possessor will marry some one of great wealth or distinction (6, Plate XVIII.).

When the Line of Marriage or a branch of it extends into the hand and either meets or rises up to connect with the Line of Sun, it indicates that the person will marry someone who is wealthy or notable (6, Plate XVIII.).

When this above-mentioned line bends downward and cuts the Line of Sun, it denotes that the person on whose hand it is found will lose his position by the marriage he will make.

When the line mentioned above curves downward and crosses the Line of Sun, it indicates that the person whose hand it is on will lose their position due to the marriage they will enter into.

When any line from the top of the Mount of Mercury falls down into the Marriage Line, it shows that there will be great obstacles to overcome in whatever marriage the subject enters, but if the Line of Marriage is a good one, then such obstacles will be overcome.

When any line from the top of the Mount of Mercury crosses into the Marriage Line, it indicates that there will be significant challenges to face in whatever marriage the person enters. However, if the Marriage Line is strong, those challenges can be surmounted.

When there is another line much slighter in appearance lying close to the upper side of the Marriage Line, it foretells some influence that will come into the subject's life after marriage.

When there’s a fainter line close to the upper side of the Marriage Line, it indicates an influence that will enter the subject's life after marriage.

All lines that cross the hand from the Mount of Mars (6, Plate XVII.), and rise up towards the Line of Marriage denote the interference of people with the marriage. These lines give the date of the interference[Pg 77] when they cross the Line of Destiny; they cause quarrels when they come from Mars; from Venus they also denote annoyances, but not of such a vindictive nature (7, Plate XVII.).

All lines that cross the hand from the Mount of Mars (6, Plate XVII.), and extend upwards towards the Line of Marriage indicate the influence of others on the marriage. These lines show the timing of the interference[Pg 77] when they intersect with the Line of Destiny; they lead to conflicts when they originate from Mars; from Venus, they indicate disturbances, but not in a spiteful way (7, Plate XVII.).

INFLUENCE LINES TO THE FATE LINE ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS, AND OTHER SIGNS WHICH ALSO HAVE A MEANING IN CONNECTION WITH MARRIAGE

The student may also get very great help in ascertaining details about the likely marriage of the person whose hands he is examining by the following:

The student can also get a lot of help in figuring out details about the potential marriage of the person whose hands he is examining by the following:

Fine Influence Lines seen joining the Line of Fate (7, Plate XVIII.), relate to persons who come into and affect the Destiny.

Fine Influence Lines connecting the Line of Fate (7, Plate XVIII.), are related to people who enter and impact Destiny.

If the Line of Influence is very strong where it joins the Fate Line, and if at about the same date a clear Marriage Line is seen on the Mount of Mercury, the date of marriage may be more accurately predicted by the place on the Fate Line where the Influence Line joins it.

If the Line of Influence is really strong where it meets the Fate Line, and if around the same time there's a clear Marriage Line on the Mount of Mercury, you can more accurately predict the date of marriage based on where the Influence Line connects with the Fate Line.

A great wealth of detail may also be made out from observing these Influence Lines to the Destiny:

A lot of detail can also be gathered from examining these Influence Lines to the Destiny:

Coming over from the Mount of the Moon, there is always something romantic about the union. The person on whose hand this Line appears will as a rule meet his affinity when travelling or away from his home.

Coming over from the Mount of the Moon, there's always something romantic about the connection. The person with this Line on their hand will usually meet their soulmate while traveling or away from home.

If the Influence Line has an "island" marked on it, the influence will then be a bad one, or, at least, the person will have had some scandal connected with his or her past life (8, Plate XVIII.). If the Line of Fate looks weaker or more uncertain after the union is marked, then such a marriage has not brought good or[Pg 78] success to the subject. If, on the contrary, the Line of Fate looks better or stronger after the Influence Line has joined it, then this union will prove of advantage to the person whose hand is being examined.

If the Influence Line has an "island" marked on it, the impact will be negative, or at the very least, the person will have some scandal linked to their past (8, Plate XVIII.). If the Line of Fate appears weaker or more uncertain after the union is marked, then this marriage hasn't brought any good or[Pg 78] success to the individual. On the other hand, if the Line of Fate looks better or stronger after the Influence Line has connected to it, then this union will be beneficial for the person whose hand is being examined.

Plate XVIII. MARRIAGE LINES AND INFLUENCE LINES WHICH FURTHER HELP IN DENOTING MARRIAGE. Plate XVIII. MARRIAGE LINES AND INFLUENCE LINES THAT FURTHER ASSIST IN INDICATING MARRIAGE.

This increase of wealth or power is still more accentuated if at the same time it is observed that a Sun Line has made its appearance.[Pg 79]

This increase in wealth or power is even more noticeable when you see that a Sun Line has appeared.[Pg 79]

If the Influence Line should cut through the Fate Line, and appear on the thumb side of it, the affection will seldom last as long, or be so happy (7, Plate XVIII.). If a still wider separation of the Influence Line and the Fate Line appear as these two lines ascend the hand together, the separation of interests and destiny of the two persons will be still more marked as the years proceed.

If the Influence Line crosses the Fate Line and shows up on the thumb side, the relationship is unlikely to last long or be very happy (7, Plate XVIII.). If there's an even bigger gap between the Influence Line and the Fate Line as these two lines rise on the hand, the difference in interests and destinies of the two people will become even more obvious as the years go by.

If an Influence Line approaches close to the Line of Fate, and runs parallel with it for some time but does not join it, some great obstacle will prevent a marriage ever taking place (see also page 57).

If an Influence Line gets close to the Line of Fate and runs parallel to it for a while without connecting, some major obstacle will prevent the marriage from happening (see also page 57).

If an Influence Line terminates in an "island," the influence itself will itself get into trouble, generally disgrace of some character (10, Plate XVIII.).[5]

If an Influence Line ends in an "island," the influence itself will likely face some trouble, usually resulting in some kind of disgrace (10, Plate XVIII.).[5]

[5] For further particulars refer back to chapter on the Line of Destiny, where these Influence Lines are also referred to (page 57).

[5] For more details, check the chapter on the Line of Destiny, where these Influence Lines are mentioned as well (page 57).

INFLUENCE LINES ON THE MOUNT OF VENUS

These are fine lines that run parallel with the Line of Life (11-11, Plate XVIII.), but they must not be confounded with the Line of Mars, or "Sister Life Line," which commences higher up nearer the Mount of Mars.

These are fine lines that run parallel to the Line of Life (11-11, Plate XVIII.), but they shouldn't be confused with the Line of Mars, or the "Sister Life Line," which starts higher up near the Mount of Mars.

These Venus Influence Lines are more often found with those persons who have what is called the "Venus temperament," or who are intensely emotional and passionate.

These Venus Influence Lines are more commonly seen in people who have what's known as the "Venus temperament," or who are very emotional and passionate.

When many of such lines are seen, the subject cannot live without love, and will have many "affairs" at the same time.

When a lot of these signs are seen, the person cannot live without love and will have multiple "relationships" at the same time.

As such an Influence Line runs parallel with the Life Line, or turns away from it, so it can be judged[Pg 80] how long such an influence will last, and with fair accuracy the date when it will occur (for dates see page 113).

As such, an Influence Line runs parallel to the Life Line, or diverges from it, allowing us to assess[Pg 80] how long that influence will last and approximately when it will happen (for dates see page 113).

These Influence Lines, however, never have the same importance or meaning as those previously ascribed to the Line of Fate.

These Influence Lines, however, never carry the same significance or meaning as those earlier attributed to the Line of Fate.

In my large work on this subject, Cheiro's Language of the Hand, I have been able to go into still greater detail with regard to all these Influence Lines.[Pg 81]

In my extensive work on this topic, Cheiro's Language of the Hand, I’ve been able to explore these Influence Lines in even greater detail.[Pg 81]


CHAPTER IX

LINES DENOTING CHILDREN, THEIR SEX, AND OTHER MATTERS CONCERNING THEM

The Lines relating to children are those finely marked upright lines found immediately above the Line of Marriage (12, Plate XVIII.). A very good plan, in trying to see these Lines, is to press this portion of the hand with the tips of the fingers, and then note which of these small lines stand out the most clearly.

The lines about children are the fine vertical lines located just above the Line of Marriage (12, Plate XVIII.). A great way to identify these lines is to press this area of the hand with your fingertips and observe which of these small lines are most prominent.

Sometimes they are extremely deeply marked, and as a rule much more so on a woman's hand than on a man's. In many cases it is necessary to employ a magnifying glass in order to see them.

Sometimes they are really deep, and usually more so on a woman's hand than on a man's. In many cases, you need to use a magnifying glass to see them.

Broad and deep lines denote male children, fine and narrow lines, females.

Broad and deep lines represent boys, while fine and narrow lines indicate girls.

When they appear as straight lines they denote strong healthy children, but when very faint or crooked, the children indicated are always delicate.

When they show up as straight lines, they indicate strong, healthy children, but when they are very faint or crooked, the children indicated are always delicate.

When the first part of the little line (taking it upward from the Line of Marriage) is marked with a small "island," such a child will be very delicate in its early life, but if the line appears well marked when the "island" is passed, the probability is that it will grow up strong and healthy. When ending or broken at the "island" the child will never grow up.[Pg 82]

When the first part of the little line (moving it upward from the Line of Marriage) has a small "island," that child will be quite delicate in their early life. However, if the line is clearly marked after the "island," it's likely that they will grow up strong and healthy. If the line ends or is broken at the "island," the child will never grow up.[Pg 82]

When one line stands out very clear and distinct among the others, the child the mark indicates will be more to the parent, and will be more successful than any of the others.

When one line stands out clearly and distinctly from the others, the child that line points to will mean more to the parent and will be more successful than the rest.

To know the number of children anyone will have, it is necessary to count these lines from the outside of the hand in towards the palm.

To determine how many children someone will have, you need to count these lines on the outside of the hand moving in toward the palm.

A person with the Mount of Venus very flat on the hand, and very poorly developed, is not likely to have any children at all, and this is all the more certain if the first Bracelet is found rising up like an arch into or towards the palm (see page 91).[Pg 83]

A person with a very flat and underdeveloped Mount of Venus on their hand is unlikely to have any children, especially if the first Bracelet is arching up towards the palm (see page 91).[Pg 83]


CHAPTER X

THE LINE OF HEALTH OR THE HEPATICA

There has been very considerable discussion among students of this subject as to the part of the hand on which the Line of Health (1-1, Plate XIX.) commences.

There has been a lot of discussion among students of this subject about where the Line of Health (1-1, Plate XIX.) begins on the hand.

My own theory, and one that I have proved by over twenty-five years' experience and also watching its growth on the hands of children, is, that it rises at the base of or on the face of the Mount of Mercury, and as it grows across the hand and attacks the Line of Life, it foreshadows the development of illness or germ of disease, which, at the date of its coming in contact with the Line of Life, will reach the climax of its attack.

My own theory, which I've confirmed through over twenty-five years of experience and observing its impact on children, is that it starts at the base or on the surface of the Mount of Mercury. As it spreads across the hand and affects the Line of Life, it indicates the onset of illness or the presence of disease, which, when it touches the Line of Life, will peak in its severity.

The Line of Life, it must be remembered, merely relates to the promised length of life from heredity and natural causes, but the Line of Health denotes the effect of the class of life the subject has led. Where these two lines come together, if one is of equal strength to the other, will be the date of death, even though the Line of Life should pass this point and appear to be a much greater length (2, Plate XIX.).

The Line of Life only indicates the expected length of life based on heritage and natural factors, while the Line of Health reflects the impact of the lifestyle the person has experienced. Where these two lines intersect, if they are of equal strength, marks the date of death, even if the Line of Life extends beyond this point and seems much longer (2, Plate XIX.).

The Line of Mercury, or of Health, relating as it does to the nervous system, and also to the mind (Mercury), lends itself to the supposition that the all-knowing[Pg 84] subconscious brain is cognisant, even at an early age, of the force of resistance in the nervous system. It may know how long this force will last, when it will be exhausted, and consequently may mark the hand long years in advance.

The Line of Mercury, or the Line of Health, which connects to both the nervous system and the mind (Mercury), suggests that the all-knowing[Pg 84] subconscious mind is aware, even from a young age, of the strength of resistance in the nervous system. It might understand how long this strength will last, when it will run out, and as a result, may indicate this on the hand many years ahead of time.

Plate XIX. THE LINE OF HEALTH. Plate XIX. THE LINE OF HEALTH.

The Line of Health is one of the lines of the hand most subject to changes. It is the thermometer of the life showing its "rise and fall" as the case may be. I have seen this mysterious line look deep and threatening[Pg 85] during the early years of a life, and completely fade away as greater health and strength took possession of the body.

The Line of Health is one of the lines on the hand that changes the most. It reflects the state of life, showing its "ups and downs" as it happens. I've seen this mysterious line appear dark and foreboding[Pg 85] during the early years of life, only to completely disappear as better health and strength took over the body.

Again, I have often seen it look deeper and more ominous as the wear and tear, especially of the nervous system, began to make itself manifest, or when the subject over-taxed his mental strength.

Again, I've often noticed it appearing deeper and more threatening as the wear and tear, particularly on the nervous system, started to show, or when the person pushed their mental limits too far.

Further, it is an excellent sign to be without this line altogether. Its absence denotes an extremely robust, strong constitution, and a healthy state of the nervous system.

Furthermore, it’s a great sign to not have this line at all. Its absence indicates a very strong constitution and a healthy nervous system.

If a hand has the Line of Health, the best position for it is to lie straight down the hand, and not approach or touch the Line of Life (3-3, Plate XIX.). When found crossing the hand, and touching or throwing branches across to the Line of Life, it foretells that there is some illness at work which is undermining the health.

If a hand has the Line of Health, the ideal position for it is to run straight down the hand and not come close to or touch the Line of Life (3-3, Plate XIX.). If it crosses the hand and touches or branches off toward the Line of Life, it indicates that there is some illness affecting overall health.

If it rises and seems like a branch from the Heart Line, especially if both these lines are broad in appearance and with the Health Line running down the palm coming in contact with the Line of Life, it is a certain indication of weakness or disease of the heart.

If it rises and looks like a branch coming from the Heart Line, especially if both lines are broad and the Health Line runs down the palm, touching the Line of Life, it definitely indicates a weakness or illness of the heart.

The student should always observe the kind of nails there are on the hand when thinking out the diseases indicated by the Line of Health.[6]

The student should always pay attention to the type of nails on the hand when considering the diseases suggested by the Line of Health.[6]

[6] See Chapter on Nails, page 136.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Refer to Chapter on Nails, page __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

When the finger nails are short, without moons, and round, and the Line of Health is strongly marked, he may be sure that nervous weak action of the heart is decidedly threatened.

When the fingernails are short, without moons, and round, and the Line of Health is clearly defined, he can be sure that weak nervous activity of the heart is definitely at risk.

When the nails are long and almond-shaped, there is danger of weakness and delicacy of the lungs. With the same shape of nails, and with islands in the[Pg 86] upper part of the Health Line (4, Plate XIX.), consumption of the lungs and tuberculosis will make itself manifest.

When nails are long and almond-shaped, there is a risk of weak and delicate lungs. If the nails have the same shape and there are islands in the[Pg 86] upper part of the Health Line (4, Plate XIX.), it may indicate lung consumption and tuberculosis.

When the nails are very flat, and especially shell-shaped (see Plate V., Part II.), and the Line of Health is deeply marked, paralysis and the worst forms of nerve diseases are threatening the subject.

When the nails are very flat, especially if they're shell-shaped (see Plate V., Part II.), and the Line of Health is clearly defined, it indicates that paralysis and severe forms of nerve diseases could be a risk for the person.

When this line is very red in small spots, especially when pressed, rheumatic fever is indicated.

When this line is very red in small spots, especially when pressed, it indicates rheumatic fever.

When twisted, irregular, and yellowish in colour, the subject will suffer from biliousness and liver complaints.

When twisted, irregular, and yellowish in color, the person will experience nausea and liver issues.

When found heavily marked, and only joining the Heart and Head Lines together, it foreshadows brain-fever, especially when any islands are marked on the Line of Head.

When heavily marked and only connecting the Heart and Head Lines, it suggests brain fever, especially if there are any islands marked on the Head Line.

The Line of Health, running straight down the hand but not touching the Line of Life, indicates that though the constitution may not be robust, it is wiry, and there is great reserve resistance to disease.

The Line of Health, which runs straight down the hand but doesn’t touch the Line of Life, shows that while the constitution might not be strong, it is resilient, and there is a strong ability to resist disease.

In connection with the examination of the Line of Health, the student must always look for other indications to the rest of the lines of the hand, more especially to the Line of Life and Line of Head. For instance, when the Line of Life looks very chained and weak, the Health Line on a hand will naturally increase the danger of delicate health; and when found with a Line of Head full of little islands, or like a chain, such a Health Line more clearly foreshadows brain disease, severe headaches, etc.

In examining the Line of Health, the student should always consider other indicators from the rest of the lines on the hand, particularly the Line of Life and the Line of Head. For example, if the Line of Life appears very chain-like and weak, the Health Line on that hand will likely indicate a greater risk of poor health. Additionally, if the Line of Head is filled with small islands or resembles a chain, this Health Line more clearly suggests issues like brain disease, severe headaches, and so on.

By a study of this line the most valuable warnings may be given of approaching ill-health. Whether persons will follow the warnings or not is a question. My experience is that they do not and will not, and[Pg 87] therefore, whatever is indicated will most probably come to pass.

By examining this line, we can get important alerts about coming health issues. Whether people pay attention to these alerts is another matter. My experience shows that they often ignore them, and[Pg 87] as a result, what is predicted is likely to actually happen.

Providence places many signposts and warnings in our paths, but human nature is either too blind or too self-confident to notice them until it is too late.[Pg 88]

Providence puts many signs and warnings in our way, but human nature is either too blind or too confident to see them until it’s too late.[Pg 88]


CHAPTER XI

THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, AND THE BRACELETS

These marks are classed among the minor lines of the hands, but they often have a significance that is of the greatest importance.

These marks are considered minor lines on the hands, but they often carry significance that is highly important.

The Girdle of Venus is that broken or sometimes unbroken kind of semi-circular line that is found rising from the base of the first finger to the base of the fourth (1-1, Plate XX.).

The Girdle of Venus is that broken or sometimes unbroken kind of semi-circular line that extends from the base of the index finger to the base of the ring finger (1-1, Plate XX.).

I have not in my experience found this mark to indicate the gross sensuality that is so often ascribed to it by other writers. It should be remembered that the hand is divided by the Line of Head, as it were, into two hemispheres, the lower and the upper.

I have not found this mark to show the extreme sensuality that many other writers attribute to it. It's important to remember that the hand is divided by the Line of Head, almost like two hemispheres, the lower and the upper.

The lower relates to the physical or more animal side of the nature, and the upper to the intellectual. Following this arrangement, it is only reasonable to assume that this mark under consideration, viz., the Girdle of Venus, relates more to the mental side of the symbolism of the Venus nature.

The lower relates to the physical or more animal side of our nature, while the upper pertains to the intellectual aspect. Based on this setup, it's reasonable to think that the mark we're discussing, the Girdle of Venus, is more connected to the mental side of the symbolism related to Venus.

I have found that persons with this sign are more mentally sensual than physically so. They love to read or write books on the subject of the "sex problem," but they are not inclined to put their theories and ideas into practice, at least with their own lives.[Pg 89]

I’ve noticed that people with this sign tend to be more intellectually sensual than physically so. They enjoy reading or writing about the “sex problem,” but they’re not really motivated to apply their theories and ideas to their own lives.[Pg 89]

The qualities, however, that this mark represents are much more active and dangerous when this Girdle forms itself from the Mount of Saturn to that of Mercury. The imaginings of such people are then morbid and unhealthy.

The qualities that this mark represents are much more active and dangerous when this Girdle stretches from the Mount of Saturn to that of Mercury. The thoughts of these individuals become morbid and unhealthy.

Plate XX. THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, THE THREE BRACELETS, THE LINE OF INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA. Plate XX. THE GIRDLE OF VENUS, THE RING OF SATURN, THE THREE BRACELETS, THE LINE OF INTUITION, AND THE VIA LASCIVA.

To those who study Astrology, the inference that[Pg 90] I draw from the connection of these two parts of the hand will become clear and reasonable.

To those who study Astrology, the conclusion that[Pg 90] I reach from the link between these two parts of the hand will be clear and sensible.

When broken or made up of little pieces, the Girdle of Venus has little meaning except to show a hysterical temperament, with a leaning towards the tendencies I have mentioned above.

When it's broken or made up of small pieces, the Girdle of Venus doesn't mean much other than indicating a hysterical temperament, with a tendency towards the traits I mentioned earlier.

These persons in all cases suffer enormously from moods, they are very difficult to live with, and when the Girdle of Venus runs off the side of the hand and passes out through the Marriage Lines, their moody, changeable natures generally make marriage for them an unusually unhappy experience.

These people always struggle a lot with their moods, making them very hard to live with. When the Girdle of Venus goes off the side of the hand and crosses the Marriage Lines, their moody and unpredictable nature usually leads to a particularly unhappy marriage.

THE RING OF SATURN

What is called the Ring of Saturn (2, Plate XX.) is very seldom found, and it is by no means a good sign to have. It is also a semi-circular line, but found lying across the Mount of Saturn.

What’s referred to as the Ring of Saturn (2, Plate XX.) is rarely seen, and it’s definitely not a good sign to have. It’s also a semi-circular line, but it appears across the Mount of Saturn.

In all my experience I have never been able to come across any person with this mark who succeeded in life or was able to carry any one of his plans to a successful termination.

In all my experience, I've never met anyone with this mark who succeeded in life or managed to see any of their plans through to a successful finish.

These people seem cut off from their fellow beings in some peculiar and extraordinary way. They are isolated and alone, and they appear to realise their lonely position keenly. They are gloomy, morbid, and Saturnine in character. They seldom marry, and when they do it is always a ghastly failure.

These people seem disconnected from others in a strange and unique way. They are isolated and alone, and they seem to fully understand their lonely situation. They are dark, melancholy, and serious in nature. They rarely marry, and when they do, it often ends in disaster.

They are terribly obstinate and headstrong in all their actions, they resent the least advice or interference in their plans. Their lives generally close in suffering, poverty, or by some sinister tragedy or fatality.

They are extremely stubborn and determined in everything they do, and they dislike even the slightest advice or interruption in their plans. Their lives typically end in suffering, poverty, or some unfortunate tragedy or fate.

It is the most unfortunate mark ever to find.[Pg 91]

It is the most unfortunate mark there ever could be.[Pg 91]

THE BRACELETS

The Bracelets (3-3, Plate XX.) are of very little importance except to throw light on certain points of health. There are supposed to be three of these lines or bracelets at the wrist, which were called by the Greeks the Bracelets of Health, Wealth, and Happiness.

The Bracelets (3-3, Plate XX.) are mostly insignificant except for highlighting some health aspects. There are thought to be three of these lines or bracelets on the wrist, which the Greeks referred to as the Bracelets of Health, Wealth, and Happiness.

It is certainly very seldom that they can be found together, for experience in life does not give much hope that these three much-sought-after possessions can ever be found together on this side of the grave.

It’s definitely rare to find them together, because life experience doesn’t offer much hope that these three highly sought-after things can ever come together while we’re still alive.

Delving back into the ancient legends of Greece, we find one very significant point in reference to the first bracelet, the one nearest the palm, which represents Health.

Looking back at the ancient legends of Greece, we discover an important detail about the first bracelet, the one closest to the palm, which symbolizes Health.

It appears that at one period of the ancient Greek civilisation all women had to come to the priest at their Temple to have their hands examined before they were allowed to marry. If the priest found this first Bracelet out of its place and rising up into the hand in the shape of an arch (4, Plate XX.), he would not allow the woman possessing this sign to be married under any circumstance, the idea being that it represented some internal malformation that would prevent her bringing children into the world. In such cases these women were made Vestal Virgins in the temples. Perhaps the old Greek Priest was right in his idea, for if this first Bracelet is found rising into the hand in the form of an arch, both men and women possessing it are delicate internally, and especially so in matters relating to sex.[Pg 92]

It seems that at one point in ancient Greek civilization, all women had to visit the priest at their Temple to have their hands checked before they could get married. If the priest noticed that the first Bracelet was out of position and arching up into the hand, he would not permit the woman with this sign to marry under any circumstances, as it was believed to indicate some internal issue that would prevent her from having children. In these cases, the women were made Vestal Virgins in the temples. The old Greek priest might have had a point, because if this first Bracelet is found arching into the hand, both men and women with it tend to be internally delicate, particularly regarding sexual matters.[Pg 92]


CHAPTER XII

THE LINE OF INTUITION AND THE VIA LASCIVA

The Line of Intuition (5, Plate XX.) is seldom found on other types of hand than those of the Philosophic, the Conic, and the Psychic, but it is sometimes found on the Spatulate.

The Line of Intuition (5, Plate XX.) is rarely seen on hands that aren't Philosophic, Conic, or Psychic, but it can occasionally appear on Spatulate hands.

It takes more or less the formation of a semi-circle from the face of the Mount of Mercury to that of the Mount of the Moon, or may be found on the Mount of the Moon alone. It must not be confounded with the Hepatica, or Line of Health, but is found as a distinct mark in itself.

It forms roughly a semi-circle from the Mount of Mercury to the Mount of the Moon, or can be found solely on the Mount of the Moon. It shouldn’t be confused with the Hepatica or Line of Health, but appears as a distinct mark on its own.

It denotes an extra highly-strung sensitive temperament, also presentiments, inspiration, clairvoyance of the highest kind, clear vivid dreams which often come to pass, intuition as to how things should be done, and very often manifests itself in inspired speaking and writing of the loftiest character.

It indicates a highly sensitive and intense temperament, along with premonitions, inspiration, and a high level of clairvoyance. This includes clear, vivid dreams that often come true, a strong intuition about how things should be done, and frequently shows up in inspired speech and writing that is of the highest quality.

It is much more often found on women's hands than on men's, although many cases have come under my notice of its being unusually clearly marked on some men's hands. In each case the possessor of it had most remarkable powers and unusual faculties, as well as the gift of intuition, even concerning purely mundane subjects that in an ordinary state they knew nothing whatever about.[Pg 93]

It is seen more frequently on women's hands than on men's, although I've noticed several instances where it's been exceptionally clear on some men's hands. In each case, the person with it had remarkable abilities and exceptional talents, along with a strong intuition, even about everyday topics they would normally know nothing about.[Pg 93]

I use the words "ordinary state" advisably here, because such people are not always in the condition of mind when these strange faculties may be employed. Several of these men were absolutely uneducated, and yet at times, when thrown into an inspired state, they were able to explain the most intricate problems with the greatest accuracy. If asked, however, from where they obtained their knowledge, they were only able to reply that "it came to them" when in certain moods.

I use the term "ordinary state" intentionally here, because those people aren’t always in the right mindset for these unusual abilities to manifest. Many of these individuals were completely uneducated, yet at times, when in an inspired state, they could explain the most complex issues with remarkable accuracy. When asked where they got their knowledge, they could only say that "it came to them" during certain moods.

One man I knew well had such remarkable dreams of coming events that he was able to warn many people weeks and months in advance of dangers that lay before them, and his warnings in many cases saved life.

One man I knew well had such incredible dreams about future events that he could warn many people weeks and months ahead of the dangers that were coming their way, and his warnings saved lives in many cases.

With all people who were gifted in this way I have noticed that they completely lost their strange powers the moment they indulged in alcohol of any kind.

I've observed that everyone who had this gift completely lost their unusual abilities the moment they drank any kind of alcohol.

THE VIA LASCIVA

This is a strange mark (6, Plate XX.) which takes the form also somewhat of a semi-circle, but in this case it connects the Mount of the Moon with that of Venus, or it may simply run off the hand from the lower part of the Mount of Luna into the wrist.

This is a strange mark (6, Plate XX.) that also looks a bit like a semi-circle, but in this case, it connects the Mount of the Moon with the Mount of Venus, or it might just extend from the lower part of the Mount of Luna into the wrist.

The first-mentioned formation indicates unbridled sensuality and passion, and where it cuts through the Line of Life it indicates death, but one usually brought about in connection with the licentiousness that it denotes.

The first formation mentioned shows uncontrollable sensuality and passion, and where it intersects with the Line of Life, it signifies death, but usually one that is linked to the promiscuity it represents.

This Line running from the Mount of the Moon into the wrist denotes the most sensual dreams, desires, and imaginings, but, unlike the other class, it is usually[Pg 94] only dangerous to the person on whose hand it is found.

This line running from the Mount of the Moon into the wrist represents the most sensual dreams, desires, and fantasies, but, unlike the other types, it is typically[Pg 94] only harmful to the person whose hand it appears on.

In both cases there is generally a tendency towards the taking of drugs such as opium, morphine, especially when the hand is noted to be soft, full, and flabby. With a firm hard palm the subject usually indulges in excessive drinking fits, and when under drink seems to have no control whatever.

In both cases, there’s usually a tendency to use drugs like opium and morphine, especially when the hand feels soft, full, and flabby. With a firm, hard palm, the person typically engages in excessive drinking binges, and when they’re drunk, they seem to have no control at all.

If the Line of Head is found weak-looking, full of islands and descending downwards on the Mount of the Moon, insanity or the worst form of degeneracy will sooner or later destroy the whole character and career.[Pg 95]

If the Line of Head appears weak, full of gaps, and sloping down on the Mount of the Moon, madness or severe decline will eventually ruin the entire character and career.[Pg 95]


CHAPTER XIII

"LA CROIX MYSTIQUE", THE RING OF SOLOMON

What is called "La Croix Mystique" is found in the quadrangle of the hand between the Lines of Heart and Head (7, Plate XX.).

What’s referred to as "La Croix Mystique" is located in the palm's quadrangle between the Heart Line and the Head Line (7, Plate XX.).

It is more usually found in the centre of this part of the hand, but it may be also found nearer the one side of the quadrangle or the other.

It’s typically located in the center of this part of the hand, but it can also be found closer to one side of the square or the other.

This mark denotes a natural gift or talent for mysticism and occultism of all kinds.

This mark indicates a natural gift or talent for mysticism and all kinds of occult practices.

When placed nearer Jupiter, it denotes the employment of these studies more to gratify the subject's own pride or ambition than the following out of such things for their own sake.

When positioned closer to Jupiter, it indicates that engaging in these studies is more about satisfying the individual's own pride or ambition rather than pursuing them for their intrinsic value.

When it is in the centre of the quadrangle, across the Line of Fate, or immediately under the Mount of Saturn, such studies become more of a religion or are followed for their own worth and the influence and truth of occultism will play a leading rôle in the whole career. Most likely the possessor of this mark will follow it as a profession, or will crystallise his researches into the form of books.

When it's in the center of the quadrangle, across the Line of Fate, or right under the Mount of Saturn, these studies become more like a religion or are pursued for their own sake, and the impact and truth of occultism will play a major role throughout their life. Most likely, the person with this mark will pursue it as a profession or turn their research into books.

When this mark lies lower down in the quadrangle, nearer to the Mount of the Moon, the subject will study some form of occultism more from a superstitious standpoint than any other. None the less, he will be likely to succeed in doing so, and influence other[Pg 96] people through his studies, and with this latter form he will be more likely to write beautiful mystic poetry with the prophetic note running through it very strongly.

When this mark is lower down in the quadrangle, closer to the Mount of the Moon, the person will study some type of occultism more out of superstition than anything else. However, they are still likely to succeed in this and influence other[Pg 96] people through their studies. With this, they will probably be more inclined to write beautiful mystical poetry with a strong prophetic tone running through it.

THE RING OF SOLOMON

The Ring of Solomon is also one of these strange marks of mysticism and occultism, but in this latter case, owing probably to the qualities signified by the Mount of Jupiter, its possessor will aim at having the power of a master or an adept in such subjects (8, Plate XX.).[Pg 97]

The Ring of Solomon is also one of those unusual symbols of mysticism and occultism, but in this case, likely due to the properties associated with the Mount of Jupiter, its owner will seek to have the abilities of a master or expert in these areas (8, Plate XX.).[Pg 97]


CHAPTER XIV

TRAVELS, VOYAGES AND ACCIDENTS

Travels and voyages may be seen on the hand by the little lines that leave the Line of Life and bend over towards the Mount of the Moon and also by the lines found on this Mount (2, Plate XXPlate XXI.).

Travels and journeys can be observed on the hand through the small lines that extend from the Line of Life and curve toward the Mount of the Moon, as well as by the lines present on this Mount (2, Plate XXPlate XXI.).

When these fine lines of travel are seen on the Line of Life, by referring to the map showing dates (Plate XXVI.), it may be possible to obtain a very clear idea of when these travels take place.

When these fine lines of travel appear on the Line of Life, by checking the map showing dates (Plate XXVI.), it might be possible to get a very clear idea of when these travels happen.

When, however, the Line of Life itself divides, and one branch of it leans over towards or on to the Mount of the Moon (I, Plate XXI.), it denotes that the entire life will be full of change and travel. In such a case it will not be possible, except by the use of some gift such as clairvoyance, to tell accurately in advance the dates of voyages that will be undertaken.

When the Line of Life splits, and one branch leans toward or onto the Mount of the Moon (I, Plate XXI.), it means that a person's life will be filled with changes and travel. In this situation, it won't be possible, unless one has a special ability like clairvoyance, to accurately predict the dates of upcoming journeys.

If the Line of Life apparently leaves its ordinary course and sweeps over to the Mount of the Moon, the life will be one continual round of travel. The person will settle nowhere, and the end of the life in such a case will take place in some land far distant from the place of birth.

If the Line of Life seems to stray from its usual path and moves over to the Mount of the Moon, the life will be a constant journey. The person won’t settle anywhere, and in this case, the end of life will happen in a far-off land, far from where they were born.

If the Line of Life has no line or branch leaving it and going in an opposite direction, but keeps to the[Pg 98] form of a semi-circle round the Mount of Venus, then such a life will be remarkably free from change and travel, and the person will remain all his life in the land of his birth (3-3, Plate XXI.).

If the Line of Life doesn’t have any lines or branches extending from it in the opposite direction, but instead forms a semi-circle around the Mount of Venus, then that life will be very stable and unchanging, and the person will stay in their birthplace for their entire life. [Pg 98] (3-3, Plate XXI.)

When a travel Line from the Line of Life ends in a small cross the journey undertaken will end in disappointment (4, Plate XXI).

When a travel line from the line of life ends in a small cross, the journey taken will end in disappointment (4, Plate XXI).

When the Line ends in a square, there will be great danger to the subject on such a journey, but he will escape, as the square is a sign of preservation from danger.

When the Line ends in a square, the subject on such a journey will face great danger, but he will escape since the square symbolizes protection from harm.

When the Line ends in an island, the journey will end in loss (5, Plate XXI.).

When the Line ends on an island, the journey will end in loss (5, Plate XXI.).

When the Travel Line crosses over near or on to the Mount of the Moon and ends in a fork or a circle, there will be great danger of the subject losing his life in undertaking such a journey.

When the Travel Line crosses near or onto the Mount of the Moon and ends in a fork or a circle, there will be a significant risk of the person losing their life by attempting such a journey.

There is always more danger in travelling on water when the subject is found to be born in the following dates:

There’s always more risk when traveling by water for those born on the following dates:

(1) Between the 21st of June and the 21st of July.
(2) The 21st of October and the 21st of November.
(3) Between the 21st of February and the 21st of March.

(1) Between June 21st and July 21st.
(2) October 21st and November 21st.
(3) Between February 21st and March 21st.

There is more likelihood of danger from collision of trains and accidents on land when the subject is born between:

There is a higher likelihood of danger from train collisions and accidents on land when the subject is born between:

(1) The 21st of April and 21st of May.
(2) The 21st of August and the 21st of September.
(3) The 21st of December and the 21st of January.
[Pg 99]

(1) April 21st and May 21st.
(2) August 21st and September 21st.
(3) December 21st and January 21st.
[Pg 99]

Plate XXI. TRAVELS, VOYAGES, ACCIDENTS AND DESCENDING LINES PROM THE MOUNTS. Plate XXI. TRAVELS, VOYAGES, ACCIDENTS, AND DESCENDING LINES FROM THE MOUNTAINS.

Danger from storms, tornadoes, thunder and lightning, is more likely to occur when people are travelling whose birthdays fall between:

Danger from storms, tornadoes, thunder, and lightning is more likely to happen when people are traveling whose birthdays fall between:

(1) The 21st of May and the 21st of June.
(2) The 21st of September and the 21st of October.
(3) The 21st of January and the 21st of February.

(1) May 21st and June 21st.
(2) September 21st and October 21st.
(3) January 21st and February 21st.

ACCIDENTS

Accidents are generally marked by lines descending from the Mount of Saturn and touching the Line of Life (6, Plate XXI.).

Accidents usually show up as lines going down from the Mount of Saturn and connecting with the Line of Life (6, Plate XXI.).

When falling on the Line of Head, they increase the danger to the head itself (7, Plate XXI.).

When they hit the Line of Head, they raise the risk to the head itself (7, Plate XXI.).

Descending lines are those that look thicker on the Mount and taper as they come downwards.[Pg 101]

Descending lines are the ones that appear thicker at the top and narrow as they go downwards.[Pg 101]


CHAPTER XV

THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, AND THE GRILLE

The Island is never a fortunate sign. Whereever it makes its appearance, it reduces the promise of the Line or Mount on which it may be found.

The Island is never a good sign. Wherever it shows up, it diminishes the potential of the Line or Mount that it’s located on.

On the Line of Life it shows delicacy or illness at that particular date where it appears (1, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Life, it indicates fragility or health issues on the specific date where it appears (1, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Head, weakness of the brain, danger of brain illness (2, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Head, weakness in the brain, risk of brain illness (2, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Heart, weakness of the heart (3, Plate XXII.), and especially so when under the Mount of the Sun.

On the Line of Heart, heart weakness (3, Plate XXII.), particularly when located under the Mount of the Sun.

On the Line of Fate, heavy loss in worldly matters, worry, and anxiety about the subject's destiny (4, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Fate, significant loss in life, concern, and stress about the person's future (4, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Sun, loss of position and generally by some scandal (5, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Sun, losing your standing and usually due to some controversy (5, Plate XXII.).

On the Line of Health, serious illness (6, Plate XXII.); if on the upper part of the Line and with small round finger-nails, throat and bronchial troubles. With long nails, delicacy of the lungs and chest. With short nails without moons, bad circulation and weak action of the heart; and with very flat nails, nerve diseases and paralysis (see Nails, page 137).

On the Line of Health, serious illnesses (6, Plate XXII.); if located on the upper part of the Line and accompanied by small, round fingernails, this indicates throat and bronchial issues. Long nails suggest potential lung and chest sensitivity. Short nails without moons indicate poor circulation and weak heart function; very flat nails point to nerve diseases and paralysis (see Nails, page 137).

Lower down on the Line of Health on the Mount of[Pg 102] the Moon, it indicates a grave tendency towards kidney and bladder troubles (7, Plate XXII.).

Lower down on the Line of Health on the Mount of[Pg 102] the Moon, it shows a serious inclination towards kidney and bladder issues (7, Plate XXII.).

Plate XXII. THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, THE GRILLE, THE STAR, THE SQUARE. Plate XXII. THE ISLAND, THE CIRCLE, THE SPOT, THE GRILLE, THE STAR, THE SQUARE.

Any Line that forms itself into an island or that runs into one, is a bad sign for that Line or particular part of the hand on which it is found. An island on any of the Mounts weakens the qualities of what the Mount expresses.[Pg 103]

Any line that turns into an island or connects to one is a bad sign for that line or specific area of the hand where it's found. An island on any of the Mounts weakens the qualities that the Mount represents.[Pg 103]

THE CIRCLE

On the Mount of the Sun the Circle is favourable (8, Plate XXII.) in all other positions it is unfavourable. On the Mount of the Moon it threatens death from drowning.

On the Mount of the Sun, the Circle is positive (8, Plate XXII.) in all other positions, it is negative. On the Mount of the Moon, it indicates a risk of death by drowning.

THE SPOT

The Spot is a sign of temporary arrest of the qualities of any Line on which it may be found.

The Spot indicates a temporary pause in the characteristics of any Line it appears on.

On the Line of Head, shock or injury. (9, Plate XXII.)

On the Line of Head, shock or injury. (9, Plate XXII.)

On the Line of Life, sudden illness.

On the Line of Life, unexpected illness.

On the Line of Health, fever.

On the Line of Health, fever.

On all the other Lines it appears to have less significance.

On all the other lines, it seems to matter less.

THE GRILLE

The Grille (10, Plate XXII.) is very often seen on the Mounts of the Hand. It denotes difficulties and obstacles in connection with whatever the Mount represents, and a lack of success in whatever quality or talent the Mount symbolises.[Pg 104]

The Grille (10, Plate XXII.) is commonly found on the Mounts of the Hand. It signifies challenges and barriers related to what the Mount represents, as well as a lack of success in whatever quality or talent the Mount symbolizes.[Pg 104]


CHAPTER XVI

THE STAR, THE CROSS, THE SQUARE

The Star (11, Plate XXII.) is with only one exception a most fortunate mark to possess. On the Mount of Jupiter, the Star promises added honour, power, and position.

The Star (11, Plate XXII.) is, with just one exception, a very lucky mark to have. On the Mount of Jupiter, the Star indicates increased honor, power, and status.

On the Mount of Sun, it gives riches and glory, but generally associated with a public life.

On the Mount of Sun, it brings wealth and fame, but it’s usually linked to a public life.

On the Mount of Mercury, unusual success in commerce, business, science, or great eloquence, according to other indications of the hand. (11, Plate XXII.)

On the Mount of Mercury, you can find signs of unusual success in business, trade, science, or great persuasive skills, based on other features of the hand. (11, Plate XXII.)

On the Mount of Mars under Jupiter, great distinction and celebrity in martial life or in some one decisive battle, which gives renown to the rest of the career, like a Wellington at Waterloo.

On the Mount of Mars under Jupiter, significant recognition and fame in military life or in one pivotal battle, which grants glory to the rest of the career, like Wellington at Waterloo.

On the Mount of Mars under Mercury, it gives honour won by the mentality fighting the battle of life (see Mounts, page 144).

On the Mount of Mars under Mercury, it represents the honor earned through the mindset that battles through life (see Mounts, page 144).

On the Mount of the Moon it is a sign of great celebrity arising from the qualities of this Mount, viz., through the imagination or inventive faculties.

On the Mount of the Moon, it’s a sign of significant fame that comes from the qualities of this Mount, specifically through imagination or creative abilities.

On the Mount of Venus the Star on the centre of this Mount is also a sign of success, but in relation to animal magnetism and sensuality it gives extraordinary success with the opposite sex.

On the Mount of Venus, the star at the center of this area is also a sign of success, but in terms of animal magnetism and sensuality, it brings remarkable success with the opposite sex.

On the Mount of Saturn it is the one unfavourable[Pg 105] sign of this particular mark, and on this Mount it gives distinction, but one to be dreaded. Such a person will be the plaything of destiny, a man cast for some terrible part in the tragedy of life. Such a man's life will end in some terrible disaster, but one which will cause his name to be on everyone's lips. A king perhaps, but one crowned by doom.

On the Mount of Saturn, there's one negative[Pg 105] aspect of this specific mark, and while it brings distinction, it's one to be feared. A person with this mark will be at the mercy of fate, destined for a tragic role in life. This individual's life will conclude in a significant disaster, one that will make his name widely known. Maybe he’ll be a king, but one doomed from the start.

Plate XXIII. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS. Plate XXIII. SMALL MARKS AND SYMBOLS.

THE CROSS

This sign is the direct opposite to the preceding sign, and has only one favourable position, viz., on the Mount of Jupiter where it indicates some extraordinary fortunate affection which will come into the life. On all the other Mounts it is evil.

This sign is the direct opposite of the previous sign and has only one positive position, which is on the Mount of Jupiter, where it signifies an extraordinary fortunate affection that will enter one’s life. In all the other positions, it is unfavorable.

On the Mount of Saturn, violent death. (12, Plate XXII.)

On the Mount of Saturn, a brutal death. (12, Plate XXII.)

On the Mount of Sun, disappointment in riches.

On the Mount of Sun, disappointment in wealth.

On the Mount of Mercury, dishonesty.

On the Mount of Mercury, there’s dishonesty.

On the Mount of Mars (under Mercury) great opposition.

On the Mount of Mars (below Mercury), there is significant conflict.

On the Mount of Mars (under Jupiter) violence and even death from quarrels.

On the Mount of Mars (under Jupiter), there are fights and even death from disputes.

On the Mount of the Moon it denotes a fatal influence to the imagination. Such a man will deceive himself. When low down on this Mount it foreshadows death by drowning.

On the Mount of the Moon, it signifies a harmful influence on the imagination. Such a person will be self-deceptive. When positioned low on this Mount, it suggests a death by drowning.

On the Mount of Venus it indicates some fatal influence of the affections.

On the Mount of Venus, it suggests some negative impact on emotions.

Above the Line of Head it foretells an accident or injury to the head.

Above the Line of Head, it indicates an accident or injury to the head.

Above the Line of Heart, the sudden death of some loved one.

Above the Line of Heart, the unexpected death of a loved one.

THE SQUARE

The Square (13, Plate XXII.) is usually called the Mark of Preservation. It shows escape from dangers at that particular moment where it appears.

The Square (13, Plate XXII.) is commonly known as the Mark of Preservation. It signifies a way out of danger at the specific moment it appears.

When on the Line of Life it means preservation from death. (13, Plate XXII.)

When on the Line of Life, it means being spared from death. (13, Plate XXII.)

On the Line of Fate, preservation from loss, and so on with each quality represented by the different lines.[Pg 107]

On the Line of Fate, protection against loss, and so on with each quality shown by the different lines.[Pg 107]


CHAPTER XVII

DIFFERENT CLASSES OF LINES

The lines on the palm should be clearly marked, a good pink or reddish colour, and they should be free from breaks, crosses, holes or irregularities of all kinds.

The lines on the palm should be clearly defined, a nice pink or reddish color, and they should be free of breaks, crosses, holes, or any irregularities.

When very pale in colour they show lack of force and loss of energy, and often poor health.

When they are very pale in color, it indicates a lack of strength and energy, and often poor health.

When extremely red they indicate excessive energy and a rather violent disposition.

When extremely red, they show too much energy and a pretty aggressive attitude.

When yellow in colour they denote a tendency to biliousness and liver complaints, and tell in consequence of a melancholy morose nature.

When they are yellow, it indicates a tendency toward liver issues and bile problems, which in turn suggests a gloomy and moody personality.

Forked lines are generally good and increase the quality of the special indication. When at the end of the Line of Head, the fork gives more of what is called a dual mentality and less power of concentration on any one subject. (Plate XXIV.)

Forked lines are usually beneficial and enhance the quality of the special indication. When located at the end of the Line of Head, the fork suggests a dual mindset and reduces the ability to focus on any one topic. (Plate XXIV.)

Spots on a Line weaken it and arrest its growth.

Spots on a Line weaken it and stop its growth.

Tasselled Lines (Plate XXIV.) are not good signs. They weaken any indication the line itself denotes, and at the end of a Life Line they foreshadow loss of all nervous energy.

Tasselled Lines (Plate XXIV.) are bad signs. They diminish any meaning the line itself represents, and at the end of a Life Line, they signal a loss of all nervous energy.

Wavy Lines (Plate XXIV.) show uncertainty, lack of decision and want of force.

Wavy Lines (Plate XXIV.) indicate uncertainty, indecision, and a lack of strength.

Broken Lines (Plate XXIV.) destroy the meaning of[Pg 108] the line at the particular place where the break appears, but if one line ends above the other, the break is not so bad and the quality of the line will be continued.

Broken lines (Plate XXIV.) ruin the meaning of[Pg 108] the line at the specific point where the break occurs, but if one line finishes above another, the break isn't as significant and the quality of the line will carry on.

Plate XXIV. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS. Plate XXIV. MINOR MARKS AND SIGNS.

Sister Lines (Plate XXIV.) increase or double the power of any line, and when lying close together at the Line of Head, they give it great power and promise.

Sister Lines (Plate XXIV.) increase or double the power of any line, and when they are positioned close together at the Line of Head, they provide significant strength and potential.

Islands (Plate XXIV.) are always evil and denote weakness or failure of the Line or Mount on which they may be found.

Islands (Plate XXIV.) are always bad and represent the weakness or failure of the Line or Mount where they’re located.

Ascending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are good from any line from which they spring. From the Line of Life they denote increased energy wherever they make their appearance. If they run up to any particular Mount or part of the hand, they show that the increased[Pg 109] effort or energy will be in that particular direction.

Ascending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are beneficial from any line they originate from. From the Line of Life, they indicate heightened energy wherever they appear. If they extend toward a specific Mount or area of the hand, they suggest that the increased[Pg 109] effort or energy will be directed in that specific way.

Descending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are the reverse and mean loss of power.

Descending Lines (Plate XXIV.) are the opposite and signify a loss of power.

Chained Lines show lack of force or fixity of purpose. (Plate XXIV.).

Chained lines indicate a lack of strength or determination. (Plate XXIV.).

When the entire hand is covered with a network of small lines, it denotes a highly nervous disposition and usually great mental worry and lack of decision.

When the whole hand is covered with a web of small lines, it indicates a very anxious personality and often a lot of mental stress and indecisiveness.

RIGHT AND LEFT HANDS

Both the hands should be examined together to see if they accord. When they do, the indication of whatever the mark is, is more decided.

Both hands should be examined together to see if they match. When they do, the meaning of whatever the mark is becomes clearer.

When something is marked on the left hand and not on the right, the tendency will be in the nature, but unless it is also marked on the right hand it will never bear fruit or come to any result. When the two hands are exactly alike, it denotes that the subject has not developed in any way from what heredity or Nature gave to him.

When something is marked on the left hand but not on the right, the tendency will be natural, but unless it’s also marked on the right hand, it won’t ever bear fruit or lead to any results. When the two hands are exactly the same, it means that the person hasn’t evolved at all from what heredity or Nature provided to them.

It must be remembered that we use the left side of the brain more than we do the right, and the nerves cross and go to the right hand. Consequently, it is this hand which denotes the developed or active brain, the left only giving the natural tendencies or inclinations.

It should be noted that we use the left side of the brain more than the right, and the nerves cross over to the right hand. As a result, the right hand represents the more developed or active brain, while the left hand mainly reflects natural tendencies or inclinations.

To be scientific and accurate the student of this subject must always keep this rule before his mind and not be led away in his judgment by some "marvellously good line" that the subject may proudly call his attention to in the left hand, for such a mark will have no actual result unless it is also found on the right hand.[Pg 110]

To be scientific and accurate, the student of this subject must always keep this rule in mind and not be swayed in their judgment by some "incredibly good line" that the subject may draw attention to on the left side, because that mark will have no real impact unless it is also found on the right side.[Pg 110]


CHAPTER XVIII

THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE

The Great Triangle is formed by the lines of Head, Life, and Health (Plate XXV.). The larger this triangle is, the better will be the health, for the reason that the Line of Health will be further removed from the Life Line. The views of life will also be broader and the field of action as it were less limited.

The Great Triangle is created by the lines of Head, Life, and Health (Plate XXV.). The bigger this triangle is, the better the health will be, because the Line of Health will be further away from the Life Line. Perspectives on life will also be wider, and the scope of action will be, in a sense, less restricted.

When the upper angle (made by the Head and Life Lines) is acute, the subject will be more nervous, timid, and sensitive.

When the upper angle (formed by the Head and Life Lines) is sharp, the person will be more anxious, shy, and sensitive.

THE QUADRANGLE

The Quadrangle, as its name implies, is that space lying between the Lines of Head and Heart. (Plate XXV.)

The Quadrangle, as its name indicates, is the area located between the Lines of Head and Heart. (Plate XXV.)

To be well marked, it should be even in shape and not narrow at either end.

To be well marked, it should have an even shape and not be narrow at either end.

When marked in this way it denotes balance of judgment, level-headedness in all things, and is a most excellent sign to have.

When marked this way, it represents balanced judgment and level-headedness in all matters, and it's a great sign to have.

It represents man's disposition or mental attitude towards his fellow men. When extremely narrow it indicates narrowness of views and bigotry in regard to religion.[Pg 111]

It shows a person's mindset or attitude towards others. When it's really limited, it reflects narrow-mindedness and prejudice, especially towards religion.[Pg 111]

When excessively wide, it denotes a lack of judgment in all things and too much looseness of views for one's good.

When overly broad, it indicates poor judgment in everything and too relaxed views for one's own benefit.

Plate XXV. THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE QUADRANGLE. Plate XXV. THE GREAT TRIANGLE AND THE SQUARE.

CHAPTER XIX

HOW TO TELL TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS IN THE LIFE

The most correct way in which to tell time by the hand is to divide the Line of Life into periods of seven years, and also the Line of Fate, following the accompanying design (Plate XXVI.).

The best way to tell time by the hand is to break the Line of Life into segments of seven years, as well as the Line of Fate, following the accompanying design (Plate XXVI.).

The Line of Head may also be divided into sections of seven years (see page 25).

The Line of Head can also be broken down into sections of seven years (see page 25).

This division into periods of seven is the most natural one of all, as the entire nature changes every seven years. Long experience has proved that, by dividing the hand in the manner shown in the accompanying illustration, the best possible results as regards dates are obtained.

This division into seven-year periods is the most natural of all, as the whole nature changes every seven years. Long experience has shown that by dividing the hand as illustrated in the accompanying image, the best possible results regarding dates are achieved.

I have also made the following curious observation concerning the most important years in people's careers, which I now publish in this work for the first time.

I have also made the following interesting observation about the crucial years in people's careers, which I am now sharing in this work for the first time.

People born on the 1st, 10th, 19th, and 28th of any month, and especially in the months of July, August, and January, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

People born on the 1st, 10th, 19th, and 28th of any month, especially in July, August, and January, will discover that the following years of their lives are the most eventful:

1st, 7th, 10th, 16th, 19th, 28th, 34th, 37th, 43d, 46th, 52d, 55th, 61st, and 70th.

1st, 7th, 10th, 16th, 19th, 28th, 34th, 37th, 43rd, 46th, 52nd, 55th, 61st, and 70th.

Plate XXVI. TIME AND DATES OF PRINCIPAL EVENTS. Plate XXVI. TIMELINE OF KEY EVENTS.

Those born on the 2d, 11th, 20th, and 29th of any month, but more especially in July, August, and January, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:[Pg 114]

Those born on the 2nd, 11th, 20th, and 29th of any month, especially in July, August, and January, will find the following years of their lives to be the most eventful:[Pg 114]

2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th, 52d, 56th, and 70th.

2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th, 52d, 56th, and 70th.

Those born on the 3d, 12th, 21st, and 30th of any month, but more especially in the months of December and February, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 3rd, 12th, 21st, and 30th of any month, but especially in December and February, will find the following years of their lives to be the most eventful:

3d, 12th, 21st, 30th, 39th, 48th, 57th, 66th, and 75th.

3d, 12th, 21st, 30th, 39th, 48th, 57th, 66th, and 75th.

Those born on the 4th, 13th, 22d, and 31st, especially in the months of July, August, and January, will find the followings years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 4th, 13th, 22nd, and 31st, especially in July, August, and January, will find the following years of their lives to be the most eventful:

1st, 4th, 10th, 13th, 19th, 22d, 28th, 31st, 37th, 40th, 46th, 49th, 55th, 58th, 64th, 67th, 73d, and 76th.

1st, 4th, 10th, 13th, 19th, 22nd, 28th, 31st, 37th, 40th, 46th, 49th, 55th, 58th, 64th, 67th, 73rd, and 76th.

Those born on the 5th, 14th, and 23d of any month, but especially in the months of June and September, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 5th, 14th, and 23rd of any month, but especially in June and September, will find that the following years of their lives are the most eventful:

5th, 14th, 23d, 32d, 41st, 50th, 59th, 68th, and 77th.

5th, 14th, 23rd, 32nd, 41st, 50th, 59th, 68th, and 77th.

Those born on the 6th, 15th, and 24th of any month, but especially in the months of May and October, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 6th, 15th, and 24th of any month, but especially in May and October, will find the following years of their lives to be the most eventful:

6th, 15th, 24th, 33d, 42d, 51st, 60th, 69th, 78th, and 87th.

6th, 15th, 24th, 33rd, 42nd, 51st, 60th, 69th, 78th, and 87th.

Those born on the 7th, 16th, and 25th of any month, especially in the months of July, August, and January, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 7th, 16th, and 25th of any month, especially in July, August, and January, will find the coming years of their lives to be the most significant:

2d, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43d, 47th, 56th, 61st, 65th, 70th, 74th, and 79th.

2nd, 7th, 11th, 16th, 20th, 25th, 29th, 34th, 38th, 43rd, 47th, 56th, 61st, 65th, 70th, 74th, and 79th.

Those born on the 8th, 17th, and 26th of any month,[Pg 115] but more especially in the months of January, February, July, and August, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 8th, 17th, and 26th of any month,[Pg 115] particularly in January, February, July, and August, will discover that the upcoming years of their lives will be the most eventful:

8th, 17th, 26th, 35th, 44th, 53d, 62d, 71st, and 80th.

8th, 17th, 26th, 35th, 44th, 53rd, 62nd, 71st, and 80th.

Those born on the 9th, 18th, and 27th of any month, but more especially in the months of April, October, and November, will find the following years of their lives the most eventful:

Those born on the 9th, 18th, and 27th of any month, especially in April, October, and November, will find the following years of their lives to be the most eventful:

9th, 18th, 27th, 36th, 45th, 54th, 63d, 72d, and 81st.

9th, 18th, 27th, 36th, 45th, 54th, 63rd, 72nd, and 81st.

This curious system it will be seen has embraced every day of every month that people can be born on. It is based on a strange law of periodicity that after years of study I have found extremely accurate and wonderful in its meaning.[Pg 117][Pg 116]

This interesting system, as you will notice, includes every single day of every month that people can be born on. It relies on a peculiar law of periodicity that, after years of study, I have found to be incredibly accurate and fascinating in its implications.[Pg 117][Pg 116]


PART II—CHEIROGNOMY

OR

THE SCIENCE OF INTERPRETING THE SHAPE OF HANDS

CHAPTER I

THE STUDY OF THE SHAPE OF THE HAND

We now leave the domain of what must be considered Palmistry, the study of the Lines of the Palm—or Cheiromancy, as it was called by the Greeks from the word χεíρ, the hand, and proceed to consider the meanings that can be derived from the shapes of the hands, fingers, etc., which is called Cheirognomy.

We now move away from what’s known as Palmistry, the study of the Lines on the Palm—or Cheiromancy, as the Greeks referred to it from the word χεíρ, meaning hand, and go on to explore the meanings that can be gathered from the shapes of the hands, fingers, and so on, which is called Cheirognomy.

These two studies may be taken up separately, but by a knowledge of both the student will be doubly armed, especially in the reading of character.

These two studies can be approached individually, but by understanding both, the student will be better prepared, especially when it comes to reading character.

To a judge of horseflesh the limbs of the horse give him such a fund of information as to the animals' breed, training, etc., that it enables him to draw conclusions that he could not otherwise obtain.

To a judge of horses, the limbs of the horse provide so much information about the animal's breed, training, and more, that they allow him to make conclusions that he wouldn’t be able to reach otherwise.

In the same way the shape of the hand gives an enormous wealth of information as to breed and peculiarities of human beings.

The shape of a hand provides a wealth of information about a person's breed and unique traits.

In a book of this nature I shall be able to give only[Pg 118] the leading traits denoted by each type, but if readers wish to carry out this study further, I must refer them to my larger works on the subject, in which the shapes of the hands are described in the fullest detail.

In a book like this, I can only provide[Pg 118] the main characteristics of each type. If readers want to explore this topic more deeply, I recommend checking out my more comprehensive works on the subject, where the shapes of the hands are described in greater detail.

The most casual observation of character as shown by the formation of hands will soon convince any person of the value of this study. Even in itself it possesses the most far-reaching possibilities in helping to a clear understanding of the difference that exists in races, their various blends of types, that have now spread themselves by intermarriage and travel over the surface of the earth.

The simplest look at a person's character through the shape of their hands will quickly show anyone how valuable this study is. It holds incredible potential for gaining a better understanding of the differences among races and the various blends of types that have emerged through intermarriage and travel across the globe.

For example, the difference in the shape of the hands of the French and German or the French and English races would convince any thinking person that temperament and disposition are indeed largely indicated by the shape of the hand itself.

For example, the difference in the shape of the hands of the French compared to the Germans or the French compared to the English would convince anyone who thinks critically that temperament and personality are indeed largely shown by the shape of the hand itself.

It is even a remarkable thing that though work and exercise may enlarge and broaden the hand, yet the type to which it belongs is never destroyed, but can be easily detected by anyone who has made a study of such matters.

It’s truly noteworthy that although work and exercise can expand and strengthen the hand, its inherent type is never lost; it can still be easily identified by anyone who has studied these things.

The Seven Types or Shapes of Hands are as follows:

The Seven Types or Shapes of Hands are as follows:

(1) The Elementary—or lowest type.
(2) The Square—or the useful hand.
(3) The Spatulate—or nervous active type.
(4) The Philosophic—or jointed hand.
(5) The Conic—or the artistic type.
(6) The Psychic—or the idealistic hand.
(7) The Mixed Hand.
[Pg 119]

(1) The Elementary—or the basic type.
(2) The Square—or the practical hand.
(3) The Spatulate—or the energetic active type.
(4) The Philosophic—or the articulated hand.
(5) The Conic—or the creative type.
(6) The Psychic—or the imaginative hand.
(7) The Mixed Hand.
[Pg 119]

THE SEVEN TYPES OF HANDS

THE ELEMENTARY

As its name implies, the Elementary is the lowest type of all. It is just a little above the brute creation. This type is extremely short (Plate I., Part II.), thick set and brutal-looking. In passing I must draw the reader's attention to the fact that the shorter and thicker the hand is, the nearer the person is to the animal.

As its name suggests, the Elementary is the most basic type of all. It is only slightly more advanced than brute creatures. This type is very short (Plate I., Part II.), stocky, and has a rough appearance. I should point out that the shorter and thicker the hand is, the closer the person is to being animalistic.

In examining this type one can therefore only expect to find it the expression of all that is coarse, brutal, and animal.

In looking at this type, you can only expect to find it reflecting everything that is rough, harsh, and primal.

People having such hands naturally have very little mental development or ability. They are found engaged in occupations requiring only unskilled labour and the very lowest even of that.

People with such hands typically have very little mental development or ability. They are usually involved in jobs that require only unskilled labor and the lowest levels of that.

They are violent in temper, and have little or no control over their passions or their anger. They are coarse in their ideas, possess little or no sentiment, no imagination or feeling, and it has been found that even the nerve system of such types is more or less in a state of non-development. They do not feel pain as the higher types of humanity feel it, and have little ambition except to eat, drink, and sleep.

They are quick to anger and have little control over their emotions. Their ideas are crude, and they lack sentiment, imagination, or feeling. Research shows that even their nervous systems are underdeveloped. They don't experience pain the way more evolved people do and have little ambition beyond eating, drinking, and sleeping.

Note.—The thumb is extremely short and low-set with the Elementary type.

Note.—The thumb is very short and positioned low with the Elementary type.

Plate I.—Part II. Fig. 1—THE ELEMENTARY HAND. Fig. 2—THE SQUARE OR USEFUL HAND. Fig. 3—THE SPATULATE HAND. Fig. 4—THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND. Fig. 1—THE BASIC HAND.
Fig. 2—THE SQUARE OR FUNCTIONAL HAND.
Fig. 3—THE SPATULATE HAND.
Fig. 4—THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND.

Plate I.—Part II.

THE SQUARE TYPE

The Square type (Plate I., Part II.,) is so designated on account of the palm being like a square in shape, or at least nearly so. Such a hand in fact "looks square."[Pg 121] It is rather straight or even at the wrist, at the base of the fingers, and also at the sides. The fingers themselves also have a "square-cut" appearance. The thumb is, however, nearly always long, well-shaped, and set high on the palm, and stands well out from the palm.

The Square type (Plate I., Part II.,) is named because the palm resembles a square in shape, or at least is close to it. This type of hand actually "looks square."[Pg 121] It is quite straight or even at the wrist, at the base of the fingers, and also along the sides. The fingers themselves also have a "square-cut" look. The thumb, however, is almost always long, well-proportioned, and positioned high on the palm, standing out prominently from the palm.

The Square Hand is also called the practical or useful hand. People who possess this type are essentially practical, logical, and rather materialistic. They belong to the earth and the things of the earth. They have little imagination or idealism, they are solid, serious workers, methodical and painstaking in all they do. They believe in things only by proof and by their reason. They are often religious and even superstitious, but more from habit than from anything else.

The Square Hand is also known as the practical or useful hand. People with this type are mostly practical, logical, and somewhat materialistic. They are grounded and focused on the tangible aspects of life. They have limited imagination or idealism; they are dependable, serious workers who approach everything methodically and with great attention to detail. They trust only what they can prove and understand through reason. They can be religious or even superstitious, but more out of habit than anything else.

They are determined and obstinate, especially if their thumbs are long and the first joint stiff.[7]

They are persistent and stubborn, especially if their thumbs are long and the first joint is stiff.[7]

[7] See Chapter on Thumbs, page 127.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Chapter on Thumbs, page __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

They succeed in all lines of work that do not require imagination or the creative faculties, and as business men, lawyers, doctors, scientists, they do extremely well, and are generally to be found in such callings.

They excel in all jobs that don't require imagination or creativity, and as businesspeople, lawyers, doctors, and scientists, they do very well and are usually found in those professions.

THE SPATULATE HAND

The Spatulate or active nervous type (Plate I., Part II.) is usually crooked or irregular looking, with large tips or pads at the ends of the fingers, rather like the spatula chemists use and from which peculiarity this type gets its name. The people who possess this type are in fact always "pounding" at something. They are full of untiring energy, enormous workers in[Pg 122] everything they take up, and generally remarkable for their originality.

The Spatulate or active nervous type (Plate I., Part II.) usually has a crooked or irregular appearance, with large tips or pads on the ends of the fingers, similar to the spatula used by chemists, which is where this type gets its name. People with this type are constantly "pounding" away at something. They are full of relentless energy, incredibly hardworking in[Pg 122] everything they take on, and are typically known for their originality.

They are not built on the hard set square lines of the former type. These persons have enormous imagination, their creative faculties largely developed. They are inventive, unconventional, emotional, demonstrative, and in fact the complete opposite in character to the class who possesses the square type of hand.

They aren’t shaped by the rigid, straight lines of the previous type. These individuals have a vast imagination, with their creative skills highly developed. They are innovative, unconventional, emotional, and expressive, essentially the complete opposite in character from those who have the square-shaped hands.

The Spatulate type has also the palm irregular in shape. It may be wider at the base of the fingers than at the wrist, or it may be found vice versa.

The Spatulate type also has a palm that is irregular in shape. It might be wider at the base of the fingers than at the wrist, or it could be the other way around.

In the first case they are then more practical in their work and views and less impulsive. With the larger development at the wrist, they are more carried away with their impulses, hasty and impetuous in temper, speech, and action.

In the first case, they are more practical in their work and opinions and less impulsive. With the increased development at the wrist, they tend to be more driven by their emotions, quick to act, and rash in their temper, speech, and actions.

THE PHILOSOPHIC HAND

The Philosophic Hand (Plate I., Part II.) received this name from the Greek φιλοσ—love, and σοφιχ—wisdom. When the Greeks made a study of hands they noticed that all those persons who possessed this type had a bent for philosophy in their blood that nothing could eradicate.

The Philosophic Hand (Plate I., Part II.) got its name from the Greek φιλοσ—love, and σοφιχ—wisdom. When the Greeks studied hands, they observed that everyone with this type had a natural inclination towards philosophy that couldn't be shaken off.

Plate II.— Part II. Fig. 1.—THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND. Fig. 2.—THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND. Fig. 3.—THE MIXED HAND. Fig. 1.—THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND.
Fig. 2.—THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND.
Fig. 3.—THE MIXED HAND.

Plate II.— Part II.

The Philosophic Hand is long, bony, and angular with knotty joints, and is as a general rule fairly thin. People with this type of hand are always studious. They are great readers and usually have a strong tendency towards literature. They love sedentary work, and have a somewhat lonely, ascetic disposition. Perhaps on account of this quality they are very often found in church-life, or largely associated with religious movements. The monks of old, I mean those who[Pg 124][Pg 123] compiled those wonderful manuscripts on doctrine, science, art, alchemy, and occult matters, all had this class of hand. In our modern times this type may be easily recognised, and the qualities it expresses remain the same even in the age of money-getting and machinery.

The Philosophic Hand is long, bony, and angular with knotted joints, and is generally quite thin. People with this type of hand are always studious. They love reading and usually have a strong inclination towards literature. They enjoy sedentary work and tend to have a somewhat solitary, ascetic nature. Perhaps because of this trait, they are often found involved in church life or heavily linked with religious movements. The monks of old, who[Pg 124][Pg 123] compiled those amazing manuscripts on doctrine, science, art, alchemy, and occult subjects, all had this type of hand. In our modern times, this type can still be easily recognized, and the traits it represents remain the same even in this age of money-making and machinery.

It is, however, more usual nowadays to find a slight modification of the true philosophic hand in that of the hand with the palm square and with the fingers only belonging to the philosophic type. In such cases the practical nature is a basis or foundation on which the studious mind builds its theories, its religion, its literary achievements, or its scientific researches.

It's more common these days to see a slight variation of the true philosophical hand in one that has a square palm with fingers that fit the philosophical type. In these instances, the practical nature serves as a foundation on which the thoughtful mind constructs its theories, its beliefs, its literary works, or its scientific studies.

As a rule the Line of Head on such hands is rather sloping, but it may also be found almost straight, and when it is, a more "level-headed" disposition will make more practical use of the studious nature. But speaking generally, people with this type of hand rarely accumulate as much wealth as those possessing the Square Hand.

As a rule, the Head Line on these hands tends to be sloping, but it can also be nearly straight. When it's straight, individuals may have a more "level-headed" personality, allowing them to use their studious nature in a more practical way. However, in general, people with this type of hand usually don't accumulate as much wealth as those with a Square Hand.

The knotted or jointed fingers give carefulness and detail in work or study. They arrest the impulse of the brain, and so acquire time for thought and reflection.

The knotted or jointed fingers show attentiveness and precision in work or study. They slow down the brain's impulses, allowing time for thought and reflection.

The Philosophic Hand is one of the highest developments of the mental side of the human family.

The Philosophic Hand is one of the greatest advancements in human intellectual development.

THE CONIC OR ARTISTIC HAND

The Conic, also called the Artistic, Hand (Plate II., Part II.), is always graceful looking, with the fingers tapering and pointed. It has, not only on account of its appearance but also because of the qualities it represents, been called the Artistic Hand.[Pg 125]

The Conic, also known as the Artistic Hand (Plate II., Part II.), always looks elegant, with fingers that are tapered and pointed. It has been referred to as the Artistic Hand not just because of its appearance, but also due to the qualities it embodies.[Pg 125]

Its possessor may not always paint pictures or design beautiful things, but he will have the emotional, artistic temperament, which loves beautiful surroundings, and is most sensitive to colour, music, and all the fine arts. It largely depends on the kind of Head Line and the will power shown by it, to determine whether its owner will develop the natural artistic temperament that he or she possesses.

Its owner might not always create art or design beautiful objects, but they will have the emotional and artistic temperament that appreciates beautiful environments and is highly sensitive to color, music, and all the fine arts. Whether this person develops their inherent artistic temperament depends largely on the type of Head Line and the willpower it indicates.

Such hands being generally full, fleshy, or soft, there is always a decidedly pronounced indolence in the nature which, if not overcome, combats the hard work necessary to achieve any real result. All very emotional people have more or less the characteristics of this type, but great numbers simply squander their time in the appreciation of art, rather than in making the effort in themselves to create it.

Such hands are usually full, fleshy, or soft, indicating a clear laziness in the nature that, if not addressed, resists the hard work needed to achieve any real results. All very emotional people share some of these traits, but many simply waste their time enjoying art instead of putting in the effort to create it themselves.

The harder and firmer this type of hand is, the more likely it is to find that its possessor will really make something out of his artistic temperament.

The tougher and more resolute this kind of person is, the more likely it is that they'll actually accomplish something with their artistic talent.

THE PSYCHIC OR IDEALISTIC HAND

This type (Plate II., Part II.), may in many ways be considered as the highest development of the hand on the purely mental plane, but from a worldly standpoint it is the least successful of all. Its possessors live in a world of dreams and ideals. They know little or nothing about the practical or purely material side of existence, and when they have to earn their own bread they gain so little that they usually starve.

This type (Plate II., Part II.) can be seen as the greatest evolution of the mind, but in practical terms, it’s the least successful. Those who have this trait live in a world full of dreams and ideals. They understand very little about the practical or material aspects of life, and when they have to support themselves, they earn so little that they often struggle to get by.

These beautiful hands do not appear made for work in any sense. They are also too spiritual and frail to deal blows and hold their own in the battle of life. If they are supported by others, or have money[Pg 126] of their own to live on, all may be well, and in such cases they will be likely to develop strange psychic gifts dealing with visions and ideals that some few may hear and understand. But if not, their fate as a rule is a sad one, they will easily be pushed aside by the rougher types of humanity or, in sheer helplessness, take their own lives, and so end the unequal struggle.

These lovely hands don’t seem built for work at all. They’re too delicate and ethereal to take hits and hold their ground in life’s battles. If they have support from others or enough money[Pg 126] to get by, everything might be fine, and in those cases, they might develop unique psychic abilities related to visions and ideals that only a few will truly understand. But if that support isn’t there, their fate is usually tragic; they’ll get easily overlooked by tougher people or, feeling utterly helpless, might take their own lives, ending the unfair struggle.

In constitution they are seldom strong physically, and consequently they are doubly unfitted for the struggle for existence.

In terms of their physical makeup, they are often not very strong, which makes them even less suited for the fight for survival.

THE MIXED HAND

What is called the "Mixed Hand" (Plate II., Part II.), is an aggregation of all the types, or at least, some of them.

What’s known as the "Mixed Hand" (Plate II., Part II.) is a combination of all the types, or at least some of them.

It is very often found having all the fingers different from one another, as for example one pointed, one square, or spatulate, and so on. Or sometimes the palm may be of one type, say spatulate, with all the fingers mixed.

It is often seen that all the fingers are different from each other, like one being pointed, another square, or spoon-shaped, and so on. Sometimes the palm might be one type, like spoon-shaped, while all the fingers are a mix.

Such persons are always versatility itself, but so changeable in purpose that they rarely succeed in making much out of any talents they may possess. They can generally do a little of everything but nothing well. They can talk on any subject that may crop up, but never impress their listeners with depth of thought on any subject.

Such people are incredibly versatile, but they’re so fickle in their intentions that they seldom manage to fully develop any skills they might have. They can usually do a bit of everything, but nothing exceptionally well. They can discuss any topic that comes up, but they never really impress their audience with deep insights on any subject.

It is only when the Line of Head is found on such hands clear and straight that there is a likelihood of these persons developing some one talent out of the versatility that this type gives.[Pg 127]

It's only when the Line of Head is clearly and straightly marked on a person's hand that there's a chance they will develop a particular talent from the versatility that this type offers.[Pg 127]


CHAPTER II

THE THUMB

In the judgment of character by the formation of the Hand, the Thumb is of about the same importance as the nose is to the face. It must be understood to represent the natural Will Power, whereas the Line of Head represents the Mental Will.

In judging someone's character by the shape of their hand, the Thumb is as important as the nose is to the face. It should be seen as representing natural Will Power, while the Line of Head represents Mental Will.

In my larger works on this subject I have gone into very deeply the medical reasons why character should be expressed by the Thumb and the extraordinary rôle it has played in civilisation, and also in the various religions of the world.

In my bigger works on this topic, I've explored in depth the medical reasons why character should be shown through the Thumb and the incredible role it has played in civilization, as well as in the different religions around the world.

The Thumb proper represents the three great worlds of ideas, viz., Love, Logic, and Will (Plate VI., Part II.).

The Thumb represents the three major realms of ideas: Love, Logic, and Will (Plate VI., Part II.).

Love is represented by the base of the Thumb which is covered on the hand by the Mount of Venus.

Love is represented by the base of the thumb, which is covered on the hand by the Mount of Venus.

Logic is the middle phalange, and Will is the top or nail portion.

Logic is the middle segment, and Will is the top or tip part.

When these divisions are found large, the qualities are increased; when small, they play a smaller rôle in the life of the individual.

When these divisions are significant, the qualities are amplified; when they are minor, they play a smaller role in a person's life.

There are two distinct classes of Thumbs, the supple-jointed and the firm-jointed.

There are two distinct types of Thumbs: the flexible-jointed and the stiff-jointed.

The former of these divisions is the Thumb bending[Pg 128] outwards and supple at the joint underneath the nail (Fig. 2, Plate III.).

The first of these divisions is the thumb bending[Pg 128] outward and flexible at the joint under the nail (Fig. 2, Plate III.).

This denotes a nature pliable and adaptable to others, very broad-minded, rather unconventional, and not obstinate in its views of life. These characteristics will be increased if the Head Line be found sloping and bending downwards. If, however, the Line of Head be found lying straight across the palm, they are more conventional. The "supple-jointed" thumb also denotes generosity of mind both as regards thought and money. In all ways these people are more extravagant than people who have the straight firm-jointed thumb. In other words they "give more" even in what they think as well as in what they do.

This shows a nature that is flexible and open to others, very broad-minded, quite unconventional, and not rigid in its outlook on life. These traits will be more pronounced if the Head Line leans and curves downwards. However, if the Head Line is straight across the palm, they tend to be more conventional. The "supple-jointed" thumb also indicates generosity of mind in terms of both ideas and money. Overall, these individuals are more lavish than those with a straight, firm-jointed thumb. In other words, they "give more" both in their thoughts and actions.

The nearer the Thumb approaches the side of the hand, or the more it looks tied down or cramped to the palm, the more the subject is inclined to grasp or hold. The true miser has always a thumb cramped towards the hand, and the nail phalange as a rule slightly turned in, as if the mind wanted to grab hold or retain.

The closer the thumb gets to the side of the hand, or the more it seems restricted or squeezed against the palm, the more the person tends to hold on or grasp. A true miser typically has a thumb that is bent towards the hand, and the nail segment is usually slightly turned in, as if their mind is trying to cling to or keep something.

The supple-jointed Thumb is more impulsive in its desire to give than is the stiff-jointed class, whereas the latter type demands reflection before he even gives an opinion.

The flexible Thumb is more eager to give than the rigid type, which requires careful thought before offering an opinion.

If a favour should be asked of the man with the supple-jointed Thumb, one should remember that he is more inclined to give in on the impulse of the moment, and if one does not press one's point home at once, he is likely first to promise, and later, on reflection, change his mind.

If you need to ask the guy with the flexible thumb for a favor, keep in mind he's more likely to agree on impulse. If you don’t push your point right away, he'll probably promise something and then change his mind later after thinking it over.

The man with the stiff-jointed Thumb (Fig. 3, Plate III.) on the contrary, is more likely to refuse at first and on reflection to agree to the proposition; but it[Pg 130][Pg 129] he does make up his mind, he will stick to his judgment or opinion, and the more he is opposed the more determined he will be to hold to his view.

The man with the rigid thumb (Fig. 3, Plate III.) is more likely to initially refuse and then, after thinking it over, agree to the suggestion; but if he does make up his mind, he will stand by his judgment or opinion. The more he faces opposition, the more determined he will be to maintain his stance.

Fig. 1.—THE CLUBBED THUMB. Fig. 1.—THE CLUBBED THUMB.

Fig. 2.—THE SUPPLE-JOINTED THUMB. Fig. 3.—THE FIRM-JOINTED THUMB. Fig. 2.—THE SUPPLE-JOINTED THUMB.
Fig. 3.—THE FIRM-JOINTED THUMB.

Fig. 4.—THE WAIST-LIKE THUMB. Fig. 5.—THE STRAIGHT THUMB. Fig. 6.—THE ELEMENTARY THUMB. Fig. 4.—THE WAIST-LIKE THUMB.
Fig. 5.—THE STRAIGHT THUMB.
Fig. 6.—THE ELEMENTARY THUMB.

Plate III—Part II.

The firm-jointed thumb is then the outward sign of a more resisting nature, and the longer the first or nail phalange is, the stronger and more powerful the Will force.

The firm thumb joint is a visible sign of a tougher character, and the longer the first or nail segment of the thumb is, the stronger and more powerful the willpower.

These people seldom make friends so easily or rapidly as those belonging to the other type. On a railway journey they rarely begin a conversation with a fellow traveller, and if they have to do so it will generally be in the form of an argument that "the window must be left open or shut," as the case may be. Heaven help the other poor traveller if he should also happen to have a stiff thumb, and oppose his ideas to those of the first.

These people rarely make friends as easily or quickly as those from the other group. On a train trip, they hardly ever start a conversation with a fellow passenger, and if they do, it usually turns into an argument about whether "the window should be left open or closed," depending on the situation. Poor other traveler, if they also have a stiff thumb and disagree with the first person’s opinion.

The supple-jointed class, on the contrary, enter readily into conversation with strangers, and they often make their greatest friends while travelling. They are affable, charming companions, and give in readily to the wishes of others. In fact, this quality inclines to a weakness that should be guarded against. Among all those men and women who take the "easiest way" a large majority will be found to have very supple-jointed thumbs. This, however, will be greatly qualified by the position and appearance of the Line of Head, the indicator of the developed mental Will.

The flexible-minded group, on the other hand, easily engages in conversation with strangers and often forms their strongest friendships while traveling. They are friendly, delightful companions, and they frequently go along with what others want. In fact, this trait can lead to a vulnerability that should be cautious. Among all those individuals who choose the "easiest path," a significant majority will be found to have very flexible thumbs. However, this will be greatly influenced by the position and appearance of the Line of Head, which indicates the strength of mental will.

To have a supple lower or middle joint does not relate to the Will but to the phalange of Logic of the possessor. When this second joint is found supple the subject adapts himself to circumstances rather than to persons. He reasons out that he must bend or adapt himself to the conditions or circumstances of the life in which he is placed.[Pg 131]

To have a flexible lower or middle joint isn’t about willpower; it’s connected to the logic of the person who has it. When this second joint is flexible, the individual adjusts to their circumstances instead of to specific people. They figure out that they need to bend or adapt to the conditions of the life they find themselves in.[Pg 131]

The Clubbed Thumb (Fig. 1, Plate III.), is so called from its being thick like a club. People possessing this class of Thumb belong to the Elementary type as far as Will is concerned. They are brutal and like animals in their unreasonable obstinacy. If they are opposed they fly into ungovernable passions and blind rages. They have no control over themselves, and are liable to go to any extreme of violence or crime during one of their tempers. In fact the clubbed-shaped Thumb has also been designated "the murderer's thumb" on account of so many murderers having been found with this formation.

The Clubbed Thumb (Fig. 1, Plate III.) is named for its thick, club-like shape. People with this type of thumb belong to the Elementary category in terms of willpower. They tend to be brutal and behave like animals due to their stubbornness. When faced with opposition, they can erupt into uncontrollable fits of rage. They lack self-control and can easily resort to extreme violence or crime during these outbursts. In fact, the clubbed-shaped thumb has also been called "the murderer's thumb" because many murderers have been found to have this thumb shape.

The possessor of a Clubbed Thumb could not, however, plan out or premeditate a crime, for he would not have the determined Will or power of reason to think it out.

The person with a Clubbed Thumb couldn't, however, premeditate or plan a crime, because they wouldn't have the strong will or ability to think it through.

The shorter the Thumb, the nearer the possessor is to the brute in passion and lack of self-control.

The shorter the thumb, the closer the person is to being like an animal in terms of passion and self-control.

The "waist-like" Thumb (Fig. 4, Plate III.), and the "straight" formation (Fig. 5), must also be considered as the opposite of one another in their characteristics, but in this case the difference is in the quality of Logic or Reason. The former will not use or depend much on such things, he will rely, on the contrary, on tact and diplomacy to gain his point or win his way. The second class have little or no tact, but in all matters depend on argument and reason.

The "waist-like" Thumb (Fig. 4, Plate III.) and the "straight" formation (Fig. 5) should also be seen as opposites in their traits, but here the difference lies in the quality of Logic or Reason. The first type doesn't rely heavily on those aspects; instead, they depend on tact and diplomacy to make their case or achieve their goals. The second type has little or no tact; they focus purely on argument and reason in all situations.

The third phalange of the Thumb, which is placed under the designation of Love (Plate VI., Part II.), when found long, denotes more control over the quality of Love or Sensuality; when short and thick-set, the passion or sensual nature is more brutal and animal.

The third phalanx of the thumb, labeled as Love (Plate VI., Part II.), when long, indicates greater control over the quality of love or sensuality; when short and thick, it signifies a more intense and animalistic passion or sensual nature.

The space at my disposal in this work will not allow[Pg 132] me to go deeper into all the shades of character that can be made out by a study of the Thumb alone, but I think I have said enough to show my readers the great truth in D'Arpentigny's words that "the Thumb individualises the man."[Pg 133]

The space I have for this work doesn't allow me to delve into all the nuances of character that can be identified just by studying the Thumb, but I believe I've said enough to highlight the significant truth in D'Arpentigny's statement that "the Thumb individualizes the man."


CHAPTER III

THE FINGERS—LENGTH TO ONE ANOTHER

THE SMOOTH AND THE KNOTTY

The First Finger is called the Finger of Jupiter.

The First Finger is known as the Finger of Jupiter.

The Second is called the Finger of Saturn.

The second is called the Finger of Saturn.

The Third is called the Finger of The Sun.

The Third is known as the Finger of the Sun.

The Fourth is called the Finger of Mercury.

The Fourth is called the Finger of Mercury.

The Finger of Jupiter, when long, gives love of power and command over others. When short it denotes dislike of responsibility and lack of ambition.

The Finger of Jupiter, when long, indicates a desire for power and the ability to lead others. When short, it suggests a dislike of responsibility and a lack of ambition.

The Finger of Saturn when long gives prudence, love of solitude and a reserved, studious disposition. When short it denotes frivolity and general lack of seriousness in all things.

The Finger of Saturn, when long, indicates wisdom, a love for solitude, and a reserved, thoughtful nature. When short, it suggests a tendency toward frivolity and a general lack of seriousness in everything.

The Finger of the Sun when long gives love of the beautiful, desire for celebrity and fame, but when excessively long, the tendency inclines more toward notoriety, risk in speculation, the love of money and gambling. When short it denotes a dislike of all these things.

The long Finger of the Sun brings an appreciation for beauty, a craving for fame and recognition, but if it gets too long, it leans more towards infamy, risky investments, a love of money, and gambling. When it's short, it suggests a dislike for all of these things.

The Finger of Mercury when long gives mental power, grasp of languages, and power of expression, especially in speech. When short it denotes difficulty in speaking, and in the expression of thoughts. When crooked, with an irregular Head Line, it is an evil sign of the Mentality.[Pg 134]

The Finger of Mercury, when elongated, indicates strong mental abilities, proficiency in languages, and effective communication, particularly in speech. When short, it suggests challenges in speaking and articulating thoughts. If it is crooked and has an irregular Head Line, it signifies a negative indicator of mental capacity.[Pg 134]

The fingers should be long in proportion to the palm; they then denote greater intellectuality and mental power. When short and stubby looking, the subject is inclined to animalism and gross materialism.

The fingers should be long in relation to the palm; this indicates higher intelligence and mental strength. When they are short and stubby, it suggests a tendency toward animalistic behavior and a focus on materialism.

When the fingers lean towards one another, they take after the qualities expressed by the finger towards which they lean.

When the fingers lean toward each other, they adopt the qualities represented by the finger they lean toward.

Plate IV.—Part II. DIFFERENT SHAPES OF FINGERS. THE SQUARE WITH SMOOTH JOINTS THE POINTED THE KNOTTY Plate IV.—Part II. VARIOUS FINGER SHAPES.

A wide space between the thumb and first finger denotes independence of will and fearlessness.

A large gap between the thumb and index finger shows a strong sense of independence and bravery.

When wide between the first and second fingers, independence of thought; between the second and third fingers, independence of circumstances; and wide between the third and fourth fingers, independence of action.

When there's a noticeable gap between the first and second fingers, it indicates independence of thought; between the second and third fingers, it suggests independence of circumstances; and a wide space between the third and fourth fingers shows independence of action.

When the fingers are found loose and inclined to[Pg 135] curve backwards, the subject is "open-minded" and quick to grasp ideas or suggestions. They will not, however, have the more methodical stick-at-it quality of those whose fingers are found firm and stiff.

When the fingers are loose and tend to[Pg 135] curve backward, the person is "open-minded" and quick to understand ideas or suggestions. However, they won’t have the more methodical, persistent quality of those whose fingers are firm and stiff.

When the fingers are curved inwards, the subject is slower to grasp new ideas, very cautious, and inclined to hold on to what he knows or what he has.

When fingers are curved inward, the person is slower to understand new ideas, very careful, and tends to cling to what they know or what they have.

Smooth-jointed fingers are more impulsive than those with "knotty joints". The "knotty joints" arrest the impetuousness of the disposition and give reflection, love of detail in all their work and are more frequently found in the hands of all great organisers and those who require thought and reflection in carrying out their plans.[Pg 136]

Smooth fingers are more impulsive than those with "knotty joints." The "knotty joints" slow down impulsiveness and encourage careful thought and attention to detail in all their work. They are more often found in the hands of great organizers and those who need to think things through while executing their plans.[Pg 136]


CHAPTER IV

THE NAILS OF THE HAND

A study of the Nails of the Hand is a remarkably accurate guide to many diseases. This part of Palmistry is now recognised by the majority of medical men, who seldom fail quietly to observe the appearance of the nails on a patient's hand.

A study of the Nails of the Hand is an impressively accurate indicator of many diseases. This aspect of Palmistry is now acknowledged by most medical professionals, who often discreetly notice the appearance of the nails on a patient's hand.

They are peculiarly indicative of hereditary diseases, especially lungs, heart, nerves, and spine.

They are particularly indicative of genetic diseases, especially affecting the lungs, heart, nerves, and spine.

They are divided into four very distinct classes. Long, Short, Broad, and Narrow.

They’re divided into four clearly defined classes: Long, Short, Broad, and Narrow.

LONG NAILS

When the Nails are found very long, the general constitution never appears to be so strong as when they are medium in size.

When the nails are found to be very long, the overall condition doesn’t seem to be as strong as when they are medium-sized.

Persons with long Nails are more liable to all diseases of the Lungs and Chest (Plate V., Part II.), and still more so when these long Nails are seen ribbed or fluted, with the ribs running upward from the base to the edge of the nail.

People with long nails are more prone to all diseases of the lungs and chest (Plate V., Part II.), especially when these long nails appear ribbed or fluted, with the ribs extending upward from the base to the edge of the nail.

The same type of Nail, but shorter in appearance, indicates that the delicacy lies higher up towards the[Pg 137] throat, and denotes tendencies for laryngitis, inflammation of the throat, and all bronchial troubles.

The same kind of nail, but shorter in appearance, suggests that the issue is higher up towards the[Pg 137] throat and indicates a tendency for laryngitis, throat inflammation, and various bronchial problems.

When especially long Nails are bluish in colour, they denote a still more delicate constitution, coupled with poor circulation of the blood.

When particularly long nails have a bluish color, it indicates an even more delicate constitution, along with poor blood circulation.

Plate V.— Part II. Plate V.— Part 2.

SHORT NAILS

Nails short in appearance denote a tendency towards weak action of the heart, more especially so when the "moons" are very small or barely noticeable. When the Nails appear very flat and sunk into the flesh at the base they denote nerve diseases. When they are[Pg 138] "ribbed" across the Nail from side to side, the danger is still more apparent.

Short nails can indicate a tendency towards weak heart function, especially when the "moons" are tiny or hardly visible. If the nails look very flat and sunk into the flesh at the base, it may suggest nerve disorders. When they are [Pg 138] ribbed horizontally across the nail, the risk is even greater.

When a deep furrow is found across the Nail, it is a sign in any hand that an unusual call has recently been made on the nervous system by illness. If the following rule be studied, the date of this illness or strain can be very clearly indicated.

When a deep line appears across the Nail, it indicates in any hand that an unusual demand has recently been placed on the nervous system due to illness. If you study the following rule, you can clearly identify the date of this illness or strain.

As it takes about nine months for a nail to grow out from the base to the outer edge, the nail can easily be divided into sections. When the furrow or very deep "rib" is seen close to the edge, the illness took place about nine months ago; when the furrow is seen about the centre, the date was about from four to five months, and when at the base, about one month previously.

As it takes about nine months for a nail to grow from the base to the tip, the nail can easily be divided into sections. When a deep groove or "ridge" is seen near the tip, it indicates that the illness occurred about nine months ago; when the groove is seen around the middle, it was about four to five months ago, and when it's at the base, it happened about one month ago.

White spots on the Nails are a sign of general delicacy, and when the Nail is seen covered with small white flecks, the whole nervous system is in a low state of health.

White spots on the nails indicate general weakness, and when a nail is covered with small white flecks, it suggests that the entire nervous system is not in good health.

LONG NARROW NAILS

Very narrow Nails (Plate V., Part II.), show spinal weakness, and when extremely curved and very thin they indicate curvature of the spine and great delicacy of the constitution.

Very narrow nails (Plate V., Part II.) indicate spinal weakness, and when they are extremely curved and very thin, they suggest curvature of the spine and significant delicacy of the constitution.

FLAT NAILS

When the Nails appear very flat and inclined to lift themselves up from the flesh towards their outer edge, the threatened danger is towards paralysis, and still more so when they look like a shell and are pointed towards the base (Plate V., Part II.). When these[Pg 139] Nails are without any signs of moons, and whitish or bluish in colour, the disease is in a very advanced stage.

When the nails look very flat and seem to be lifting away from the skin towards their outer edge, there’s a risk of paralysis, especially if they resemble a shell and are pointed towards the base (Plate V., Part II.). When these [Pg 139] nails have no signs of moons and appear whitish or bluish, the condition is in a very advanced stage.

THE MOONS OF THE NAILS

Large "Moons" always denote strong action of the heart and rapid circulation of the blood, but when unusually large they indicate too much pressure on the heart, rapidity in its beat, the valves over-strained and danger of bursting some blood vessel in the heart or in the brain.

Large "Moons" always signify strong heart activity and fast blood circulation, but when they are unusually large, they indicate excessive pressure on the heart, a rapid heartbeat, overstrained valves, and the risk of bursting a blood vessel in the heart or the brain.

Small "Moons" indicate the reverse of this; they always denote poor circulation, weak action of the heart and anæmia of the brain.

Small "Moons" indicate the opposite; they always show poor circulation, weak heart function, and anemia of the brain.

When close to death the "Moons" are the first to take on a bluish look, and later on the entire Nail becomes blue or almost black in colour.[Pg 140]

When someone is close to death, the "Moons" are the first to turn a bluish color, and eventually the whole Nail becomes blue or nearly black.[Pg 140]


CHAPTER V

THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND AND THEIR MEANING

The Mounts of the Hand (Plate VI., Part II.) vary in the most remarkable manner in accordance with the character and dispositions of races and their different temperaments.

The Mounts of the Hand (Plate VI., Part II.) vary greatly based on the characteristics and personalities of different races and their unique temperaments.

In almost all the Southern and more emotional races, these Mounts are more noticeable than those belonging to Northern countries. It has been observed that all people with the Mounts apparent or prominent are more swayed by their feelings and emotions than those people who have flat palms and undeveloped Mounts.

In nearly all Southern and more emotional cultures, these Mounts stand out more than those from Northern countries. It's been noted that people with noticeable or prominent Mounts are more influenced by their feelings and emotions compared to those who have flat palms and underdeveloped Mounts.

The names given to the Mounts of the Hand are those also given to the seven principal planets that sway the destiny of our earth, viz., the Sun, Moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.

The names assigned to the Mounts of the Hand are the same as those given to the seven main planets that influence the fate of our Earth: the Sun, Moon, Venus, Mercury, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn.

These names were given to the Mounts by the Greek students of this subject, and were associated by them with the qualities attributed to these seven planets, such as:

These names were given to the Mounts by the Greek students of this subject, and they associated them with the qualities linked to these seven planets, such as:

Venus=Love, sensuality and passion.
Mars=Vitality, courage, fighting, etc.
Mercury=Mentality, commerce, science.
Moon=Imagination, romance, changeability.
Sun=Brilliancy, fruitfulness, success.
Jupiter=Ambition, power, domination.
Saturn=Reserve, melancholy, seriousness.

Plate VI.—Part II. THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND Plate VI.—Part II. THE MOUNTS OF THE HAND

In my own long experience I could not help but remark the intimate relation between the effect of these great planets of our Universe and humanity in general. Although it would not be within the scope of this work to teach also Astrology in these pages, I must, however, in order to help all earnest students and readers of this book, put before them the following curious evidence of the influence of the planets on our lives. This is also demonstrated by the position and shape of the Mounts on the Hand, and, as far as I know, has never been published in any book dealing with Palmistry before.

In my extensive experience, I've noticed the close connection between the effects of these major planets in our Universe and humanity as a whole. While this work won't cover Astrology, I feel it's important to share some intriguing evidence of how planets influence our lives, for the benefit of dedicated students and readers of this book. This influence is also reflected in the position and shape of the Mounts on the Hand, and to my knowledge, this has never been published in any book about Palmistry before.

In the accompanying pages it will be noticed that I have for the first time dealt with these Mounts as Positive and Negative. The following explanation of my reason for doing this should be of the greatest assistance to my readers, and will also be useful in showing the close relationship between the two sciences Astrology and Palmistry.

In the following pages, you'll see that I've for the first time referred to these Mounts as Positive and Negative. I believe the explanation behind this decision will greatly help my readers and also demonstrate the close connection between Astrology and Palmistry.

There are, it is well-known, in the Zodiac which surrounds our earth, what are called "the twelve Houses" of the seven principal planets of our Solar System.

There are, as is well-known, in the Zodiac that surrounds our Earth, what are called "the twelve Houses" of the seven main planets of our Solar System.

The Zodiac itself is described both by Astronomers and Astrologers as a pathway in the Universe, about sixteen degrees broad, in which the planets travel. It is divided into twelve Signs or Houses of thirty degrees each, and our Sun enters a new sign on an average of every thirty days. At the end of twelve months it has completed the zodiacal circle of 360 degrees, or one Solar year.

The Zodiac is described by both astronomers and astrologers as a pathway in the universe, about sixteen degrees wide, where the planets move. It's divided into twelve signs or houses, each thirty degrees in size, and our Sun moves into a new sign roughly every thirty days. After twelve months, it completes the zodiacal circle of 360 degrees, which equals one solar year.

The Sun, the creator of life, and itself the greatest mystery of our Universe, is in bulk 330,000 times larger than our earth. It therefore follows that in entering[Pg 143] a new sign of the Zodiac, it changes the magnetic vibrations of the effect of each sign towards our earth. Consequently it is reasonable to presume that a person born, say in April, and another in May, would have very different characteristics and naturally a distinct destiny, because character is Fate or Destiny.

The Sun, the source of life and the biggest mystery of our Universe, is 330,000 times larger than our Earth. So, when it moves into[Pg 143] a new Zodiac sign, it alters the magnetic vibrations associated with each sign in relation to our planet. Therefore, it's reasonable to think that a person born in April and another born in May would have very different traits and, naturally, a unique destiny, since character shapes Fate or Destiny.

My readers will now easily follow me when I state that, especially as regards health and disease, the following tables concerning the Mounts of the Hand, taken in conjunction with the date of birth, will enable them, when reading the hand, to tell many things with an accuracy that will be most convincing both to themselves and to their hearers.[Pg 144]

My readers will now find it easy to follow me when I say that, particularly regarding health and illness, the following tables about the Mounts of the Hand, when combined with the date of birth, will allow them to discover many things with an accuracy that will be quite convincing to both themselves and their audience.[Pg 144]


CHAPTER VI

THE MOUNT OF MARS

This Mount has two positions on the palm (Plate VI., Part II.); the first is to be found immediately under the upper part of the Line of Life, and the other opposite to it in the space lying between the Line of Heart and the Line of Head. The first relates to the physical characteristics and the second to the mental.

This Mount has two spots on the palm (Plate VI., Part II.); the first is located right below the upper part of the Line of Life, and the other is directly across from it in the area between the Line of Heart and the Line of Head. The first spot relates to physical traits, while the second pertains to mental aspects.

The first if large is Positive, and it has more importance when the person is born between the dates of March 21st and April 21st, and in a minor way until April 28th, which portion of the year in the Zodiac is called the House of Mars (Positive).

The first sign is Positive, and it matters more if a person is born between March 21st and April 21st, and to a lesser extent until April 28th, which is part of the Zodiac called the House of Mars (Positive).

The second is considered Negative, and it has more importance when the person is born between October 21st and November 21st, and in a minor way until November 28th, because in the Zodiac this portion of the year is denoted as the House of Mars (Negative).

The second is considered Negative, and it matters more when someone is born between October 21st and November 21st, and to a lesser extent until November 28th, because in the Zodiac, this part of the year is known as the House of Mars (Negative).

We will now consider the difference of these two positions, how distinctly they affect the mind and temperament, and also their relation as to health and tendency towards disease.[Pg 145]

We will now look at the differences between these two positions, how clearly they impact the mind and temperament, and their connection to health and likelihood of disease.[Pg 145]

THE FIRST MOUNT OF MARS

In the first Mount of Mars, at the commencement of the Line of Life, and especially when the subject is born in the House of Mars (March 21st to April 21st, and in a minor way until the 28th), he possesses a strong martial nature which will make its tendencies manifest in all actions of the life, whether the man be a business man, a soldier, or a leader of men in any line whatever.

In the first Mount of Mars, at the beginning of the Line of Life, and especially when someone is born in the House of Mars (from March 21st to April 21st, and to a lesser extent until the 28th), they have a strong warrior spirit that will show in everything they do, whether they are a businessman, a soldier, or a leader in any field.

These subjects are born fighters in every sense of the word. They brook little or no control in all their affairs; they aspire to be leaders in whatever career they undertake, and with even average intelligence they generally become heads of business houses or organisations and take on large responsibilities.

These people are natural fighters in every way. They tolerate very little control over their lives; they aim to be leaders in any career they pursue, and with just average intelligence, they usually end up running businesses or organizations and handling significant responsibilities.

They have great obstinacy of purpose and determination, they resent all criticism, they are decided and dogmatic in all their views, and seldom ask the advice of others, until it is too late to alter their purpose for good or evil.

They have strong stubbornness and determination, they dislike any kind of criticism, they are firm and opinionated in all their views, and they rarely seek others' advice until it's too late to change their plans for better or worse.

They must do everything their own way, and as they always believe their way is the only right one they resent the slightest interference from others, and will even turn on their best friend who may attempt to dissuade them from their plans or purpose.

They have to do things their own way, and because they always think their way is the only correct one, they get irritated by even the tiniest interference from others, and will even lash out at their closest friends who try to convince them to change their plans or goals.

They can only be handled or managed by kindness, patience, tact, or by their affections.

They can only be dealt with through kindness, patience, tact, or their feelings.

The slightest attempt to fight or coerce them will bring them up "in arms" in a moment. The temper is hasty and explosive, but at the same time quickly over, and when the storm subsides they bitterly regret the outburst of passion and the cruel things they may have said in the heat of the moment.[Pg 146]

The smallest effort to resist or pressure them will quickly get them fired up. Their tempers are quick and explosive, but just as fast, they cool down, and once the anger fades, they deeply regret the outburst and the hurtful things they may have said in the heat of the moment.[Pg 146]

As a rule these people are good-natured and generous, but spasmodic and impulsive in all their actions. Their greatest fault lies in their impulsiveness and lack of self-control, and unless a good Line of Head be shown on the hands, they rush madly into all kinds of difficulties and dangers and often make a complete muddle of their opportunities and the magnificent powers of leadership that they nearly all possess.

As a rule, these people are friendly and generous, but they're also unpredictable and impulsive in everything they do. Their biggest flaw is their impulsiveness and lack of self-control, and unless they have a strong Line of Head on their palms, they dive headfirst into all sorts of troubles and risks, often messing up their chances and the incredible leadership skills that most of them have.

These people as a rule are unhappy in their love affairs or domestic life. They rarely meet women who understand them, and if they are lucky enough to escape opposition from their wives, they usually meet with it in their children.

These people are generally unhappy in their romantic relationships or home life. They hardly ever meet women who truly understand them, and if they’re fortunate enough to avoid conflict with their wives, they typically face it with their children instead.

In health they are prone to fevers and blood diseases, especially in their early life. In youth they are also very liable to fits, epilepsy, severe headaches, often water on the brain, and suffer greatly with their teeth.

In good health, they are likely to experience fevers and blood disorders, especially in their early years. During youth, they are also very susceptible to seizures, epilepsy, severe headaches, often fluid on the brain, and they suffer significantly with their teeth.

In old age they have a grave liability towards apoplexy, vertigo, pains in the head and softening of the brain, and especially so if on their hands the Line of Head looks frayed, or made up of little pieces like a chain.

In old age, they are at a serious risk for strokes, dizziness, headaches, and brain deterioration, especially if the Line of Head on their palm appears frayed or made up of small segments like a chain.

Such people should be advised to cultivate repose self-control, and above all to avoid wines, spirits, and stimulants of all kinds, to which as a rule these natures are very much inclined.

Such people should be encouraged to develop self-control and, most importantly, to stay away from wines, spirits, and all kinds of stimulants, which they are usually very drawn to.

They should endeavour to sleep more than any other class, to take more recreation and exercise in the open air, and above all things to curb their pride and control their temper.

They should try to sleep more than anyone else, get more fresh air, and most importantly, keep their pride in check and manage their temper.

The higher types of these subjects and those among them who practise self-restraint, can rise to almost[Pg 147] any height in life and do great things for the benefit of their fellow men.

The more advanced individuals in these fields, especially those who exhibit self-control, can achieve nearly[Pg 147] any level in life and accomplish significant things to help their fellow humans.

THE SECOND MOUNT OF MARS

The second Mount of Mars, lying between the Heart and Head Line (Plate VI., Part II.), is more important when the subject is born between the dates of 21st October and the 21st November and until November 28th. In the Zodiac this period of the year is called the House of Mars Negative or Mental.

The second Mount of Mars, located between the Heart and Head Line (Plate VI., Part II.), is more significant for those born between October 21 and November 21, extending until November 28. During this time of year in the Zodiac, it's known as the House of Mars Negative or Mental.

In character they are the complete opposite of the former type, all the Mars qualities being in the mind and in the mental attitude towards people and things.

In character, they are the total opposite of the previous type, with all the Mars qualities present in their mindset and their attitude towards people and things.

The latter type are mentally very courageous, and possess moral courage more than physical. They hate to have scenes, or to be mixed up with physical violence or bloodshed.

The latter type are very mentally brave and have more moral courage than physical. They dislike dramatic situations and want nothing to do with physical violence or bloodshed.

They love to fight mentally, however, and in debates or arguments they also fight to the finish. They are more quietly determined than the former class of Mars subjects. They are even more obstinate in their views, but conceal their opinions, and often pass for assenting parties when in reality they are but waiting for the right opportunity to strike their "mental blow" and confuse their opponent.

They love to fight intellectually, though, and in debates or arguments, they go all the way. They're more quietly determined than the previous group of Mars individuals. They’re even more stubborn about their beliefs but keep their opinions hidden, often appearing to agree when, in fact, they’re just waiting for the right moment to deliver their "mental blow" and throw their opponent off balance.

These people make better organisers than leaders, and their mental martial spirit often finds a splendid field for their talents as the brain behind an army. In plans, tactics and strategy, in carefully thought-out stores of ammunitions, provisions, or in financial schemes that may bring ruin or discomfiture on a more warlike enemy.

These people are better at organizing than leading, and their strategic mindset often serves them well as the brains behind an army. In planning, tactics, and strategy, in meticulously organized supplies of ammunition and provisions, or in financial strategies that could lead to the downfall or embarrassment of a more aggressive enemy.

When not highly cultivated or developed, they[Pg 148] employ cunning and craft of every description to carry out their plans. They will stop at nothing to carry out their purpose. They can be the most treacherous and deadly enemies of all, and poison in opposition to the sword is one of the chief weapons they most readily employ.

When they aren't well-educated or advanced, they[Pg 148] use cleverness and all sorts of tricks to achieve their goals. They won't hesitate to do whatever it takes to succeed. They can be the most deceitful and dangerous adversaries, and poison, rather than a sword, is one of their main weapons of choice.

All these Mars Negative people have a mysterious power of magnetism, which they seem almost unconsciously to use in their dealings with others. They make natural hypnotists and thought-readers, and have strong leanings towards occultism and secret societies of all kinds. When on a highly developed plane, they use these wonderful qualities for the good of others, especially if they take up the study of medicine or science, for which work they seem usually well suited.

All these Mars Negative people have a mysterious magnetic power that they seem to use almost unconsciously in their interactions with others. They make natural hypnotists and thought-readers, and they’re strongly drawn to occultism and all kinds of secret societies. When they are highly developed, they use these amazing qualities for the benefit of others, especially if they pursue studies in medicine or science, fields for which they usually seem well suited.

Mars Negative people are generally so versatile and many-sided that they are the most difficult of all to place in some special career. If a good Line of Head be found on the hand, then there is nothing in the world of mental endeavour in which they will not make a success. It is a curious fact that these people seldom carry out what they were first trained for, and in fact in the course of their lives they are likely to change their profession or vocation as many times as the proverbial cat has lives.

Mars Negative people are usually so versatile and multifaceted that they are the hardest to pin down to a specific career. If there's a good Line of Head on their hand, they can succeed in any field of mental work. Interestingly, these people rarely stick with what they were initially trained for, and throughout their lives, they are likely to switch professions or careers as many times as the saying goes a cat has lives.

The worst fault of this type is that they are rather too adaptable to their surroundings and to the people with whom they come in contact. If they are thrown with evil-minded persons they are inclined to adapt themselves to their companions and even attempt to "go one better," but if in contact with good influences they just as rapidly develop the best that is in them.[Pg 149]

The biggest issue with this type is that they are too adaptable to their environment and the people around them. If they are around negative people, they tend to adjust to their friends and even try to outdo them, but when they're with positive influences, they quickly bring out the best in themselves.[Pg 149]

Their period of the Zodiac has from time immemorial been symbolised in their lower development as the figure of a scorpion wounding its own tail, and in their higher development that of an eagle with its head pointing upwards to the sky.

Their time in the Zodiac has long been represented in their lower form as a scorpion stinging its own tail, and in their higher form as an eagle with its head aimed upward toward the sky.

Such symbols perfectly illustrate the dual nature of the type under consideration. In their lower aspect no type can be more vicious or harmful, even to wounding themselves and bringing about their own destruction. In their higher form, however, there is probably no class whose spiritual nature can, like the eagle, soar to such heights or be so free from earthly ties.

Such symbols clearly show the dual nature of the type in question. In its lower aspect, no type can be more cruel or damaging, even to the point of hurting themselves and causing their own downfall. However, in its higher form, there is likely no class whose spiritual nature can, like the eagle, reach such great heights or be so free from earthly attachments.

Mars Negative people, especially when young, should above all things be carefully brought up with good companions. They should be especially warned to control their sex nature and be kept aloof from all perverse persons and evil books.

Mars Negative people, especially when young, should be raised with good friends above all else. They need to be specifically advised to manage their sexual impulses and stay away from all twisted individuals and harmful literature.

As regards health, this type is usually inclined to be both slight and delicate in their early years, but generally incline towards corpulency after passing middle life. Both the men and women have a likelihood of weakness or illness in the sex organs, especially in youth, also in the kidneys and the bladder, while in advanced years the stomach and digestive organs become disordered. All through their lives they should be most careful and abstemious in their diet.[Pg 150]

When it comes to health, this type is usually delicate and slender in their early years, but tends to gain weight after middle age. Both men and women are likely to experience weakness or illness related to the reproductive organs, especially when they are young, as well as issues with the kidneys and bladder. In later years, the stomach and digestive system can become disordered. Throughout their lives, they should be very careful and moderate with their diet.[Pg 150]


CHAPTER VII

THE MOUNT OF JUPITER AND ITS MEANING

The Mount of Jupiter is found at the base of the first finger (Plate VI., Part II.). When large, it shows desire to dominate, to rule and command others, to lead and organise, and to carry out some distinct object. But these good qualities will only be employed if the Line of Head is clear and long. When this line is poor and badly formed, then a large Mount of Jupiter gives pride, excess of vanity, a self-confident and a self-opinionated person. But on what is known as a good well-marked hand, there is no Mount more excellent and no surer indication of success from sheer strength of character and purpose.

The Mount of Jupiter is located at the base of the first finger (Plate VI., Part II.). When it’s prominent, it indicates a desire to dominate, to lead and manage others, and to achieve specific goals. However, these positive traits will only be effective if the Line of Head is clear and long. If this line is poorly developed or irregular, then a large Mount of Jupiter can lead to pride, excessive vanity, and a self-assured, opinionated individual. But on what’s considered a well-defined hand, there’s no Mount more impressive and no better sign of success stemming from strong character and purpose.

This Mount may be considered Positive when a person is found born between November 21st and December 20th, and in a minor way until the 28th. These persons are naturally ambitious, fearless and determined in all they undertake, but in acting on their impulses, they generally "hit too straight from the shoulder," or show their ambition too plainly, and so arouse antagonism, opposition, and enmity.

This Mount can be seen as Positive when someone is born between November 21 and December 20, with a lesser influence until the 28th. These individuals are typically ambitious, fearless, and determined in everything they do, but in following their impulses, they often come on too strong or display their ambition too openly, which can lead to conflict, resistance, and hostility.

They concentrate all their attention on whatever they may be doing at the moment and see no way but their own, especially if they feel the least opposition to their plans. They are, however, honourable and high[Pg 151] principled in almost all they undertake and respond to any trust or confidence placed in them.

They focus all their attention on whatever they're doing at the moment and can't see any perspective other than their own, especially if they sense even a little resistance to their plans. However, they are honorable and principled in almost everything they take on, and they respond well to any trust or confidence placed in them.

They are usually extremely truthful and bitterly resent any attempt at deception, and do not hesitate to unmask any effort to deceive others, even when such an action on their part may ruin their own plans.

They are often very honest and deeply resent any attempts at deception, and they don't hesitate to expose any efforts to fool others, even if doing so could potentially ruin their own plans.

They have great enterprise in business and all matters requiring organisation, and easily become the heads of businesses, or hold responsible positions in government offices or under the government. They rarely become politicians, for the simple reason that they cannot bear to bend to any party plans or schemes.

They are very enterprising in business and all aspects that need organization, easily becoming business leaders or taking on important roles in government offices or under the government. They rarely become politicians, simply because they can't stand to conform to any party agendas or schemes.

They are perhaps the most independent of all types in choosing their own careers. Because their father may have happened to be a clergyman will be no reason for them to follow his example or even hold the same views on religion.

They are probably the most independent of all types when it comes to choosing their own careers. Just because their father happened to be a clergyman doesn’t mean they have to follow his example or even share his views on religion.

It is for this reason that in early life such subjects are a cause of worry and anxiety to their parents; but they should always be allowed to choose their own career and even change it a dozen times if they wish, until at last they find their true vocation.

It’s for this reason that in their early years, these subjects cause concern and stress for their parents; however, they should always be allowed to choose their own path and even switch it multiple times if they want, until they ultimately discover their true calling.

The great fault of this class is that they are inclined to go to extremes in all things, and in doing so exhaust their efforts, and then change and fly off in another direction. But in all cases where the Line of Head is well-marked, especially when lying straight across the palm, there is no height in position or responsibility that they may not reach.

The major flaw of this group is that they tend to go to extremes in everything, which drains their energy and then causes them to switch and head off in a different direction. However, whenever the Line of Head is clearly defined, especially when it runs straight across the palm, there’s no level of status or responsibility that they can’t achieve.

HEALTH

These subjects are more inclined to suffer with rheumatism and acid complaints than from any other[Pg 152] form of disease, also inflammation of the tongue and throat, boils, carbuncles, eczema, and all skin troubles.

These individuals are more likely to suffer from rheumatism and acid-related issues than from any other[Pg 152] form of illness, as well as inflammation of the tongue and throat, boils, carbuncles, eczema, and various skin problems.

THE MOUNT OF JUPITER (NEGATIVE)

The Mount of Jupiter may be considered negative or mental when the subject is born between the dates of February 19th and March 20th, and in a slighter degree until the 28th.

The Mount of Jupiter might be seen as negative or mental for someone born between February 19 and March 20, and to a lesser extent until the 28th.

In this case the ambition takes rather the mental form than what might be termed material. Brain work and brain development is more their speciality than other forms of effort.

In this case, ambition is more about mental pursuits than what we might call material ones. They focus more on brain work and mental development than on other types of effort.

They seem to possess a kind of natural understanding of things and easily acquire all sorts of knowledge about a large variety of things, especially the history of countries, races, peoples, geographical, botanical, and geological researches.

They seem to have a natural understanding of things and quickly gain knowledge about a wide range of topics, especially the history of countries, cultures, ethnicities, and studies related to geography, botany, and geology.

In spite of this mental ambition, these people are usually so very sensitive and so lacking in self-confidence that they find the greatest difficulty in carrying out their plans and making people believe in their projects. For this reason they appear to shrink from coming before the public, and have to stand aside and see others getting the credit for what really was their plan.

Despite this mental drive, these individuals are often extremely sensitive and lack self-confidence, making it very hard for them to execute their plans and convince others about their ideas. Because of this, they tend to avoid the spotlight and end up watching others receive credit for what was genuinely their idea.

A great number of literary people, composers and artists are born in this period and exhibit all the qualities that it represents. It is again a strong clear Line of Head which, if found on the hand, will determine whether the mental will power is sufficient to make this type overcome its natural sensitiveness and use the great qualities they have to carry out their aims and ambitions.[Pg 153]

A large number of writers, composers, and artists emerge during this time and display all the qualities associated with it. It’s once again a strong, clear Line of Head, which, if present on the hand, will indicate whether the mental willpower is strong enough for this type to overcome its natural sensitivity and utilize their great qualities to achieve their goals and ambitions.[Pg 153]

HEALTH

People born in this period suffer largely from despondency, insomnia, and a feeling of martyrdom. Like the Positive type of the same Mount, they are also much inclined towards rheumatism and disorders brought on through the blood.

People born during this time often struggle with feelings of hopelessness, trouble sleeping, and a sense of victimhood. Similar to the Positive type of the same Mount, they are also quite prone to rheumatism and blood-related disorders.

They also suffer from internal chills, liver, and very often jaundice. Climate has the greatest possible effect upon their health, so they should endeavour to live in a bright, dry atmosphere and have plenty of air and exercise, and variety of change and travel.[Pg 154]

They also experience internal chills, liver issues, and frequently jaundice. Climate greatly impacts their health, so they should try to live in a bright, dry environment with plenty of fresh air and exercise, along with a variety of activities and travel.[Pg 154]


CHAPTER VIII

THE MOUNT OF SATURN AND ITS MEANING

The Mount of Saturn is found at the base of the second finger (see Plate VI., Part II.). Its chief characteristics are love of solitude, prudence, quiet determination, the study of serious sombre things, the belief in fatalism and in the ultimate destiny of all things.

The Mount of Saturn is located at the base of the second finger (see Plate VI., Part II.). Its main traits are a preference for solitude, caution, quiet determination, an interest in serious and somber topics, and a belief in fatalism and the ultimate fate of all things.

A complete absence of this Mount indicates a more or less frivolous way of looking at life, while an exaggeration of it denotes an exaggeration of all the qualities it represents.

A complete lack of this Mount suggests a somewhat carefree approach to life, while an overemphasis on it indicates an overemphasis on all the qualities it represents.

The Mount of Saturn may be considered Positive when the subject is found to be born between the following dates, December 21st and January 20th, and during the subsequent seven days while this period is fading out and being overlapped by the period following.

The Mount of Saturn can be seen as Positive when a person is born between December 21 and January 20, and during the next seven days as this period ends and overlaps with the following one.

People born in these dates have strong will force and mentality, but they usually feel exceptionally lonely and isolated in going through life.

People born on these dates have a strong will and mindset, but they often feel extremely lonely and isolated as they navigate life.

They are very much children of fate and circumstances, over which they appear to have no control, and seem to make or mar their careers independently of their strong will.

They are definitely products of fate and their circumstances, which seem beyond their control, and it looks like their careers unfold regardless of their strong will.

In character they are usually remarkable for their[Pg 155] independence of thought and action, they also detest being under the restraint of others.

In character, they are usually notable for their[Pg 155] independence of thought and action, and they also hate being restricted by others.

For kindness and sympathy they will do almost anything, but they usually feel so isolated that they scarcely believe in the affections that may be offered.

For kindness and sympathy, they will do almost anything, but they often feel so isolated that they can hardly believe in the love that might be given.

They have strange ideas of love and duty, and for this reason they are usually called somewhat peculiar by those few who attempt to penetrate their isolation.

They have unusual ideas about love and responsibility, which is why those few who try to understand their solitude often describe them as a bit eccentric.

They have a deeply devotional nature, even when appearing not to be religious, and they make every effort to do good, especially to the masses, even when there may be no likelihood of their getting recognition or reward for their efforts.

They have a deeply devoted nature, even when they don’t seem religious, and they put in a lot of effort to do good, especially for the public, even if there’s little chance of getting recognition or reward for their efforts.

Such people as a rule feel the responsibilities of life too heavily and in consequence often become despondent and gloomy or retire into their own shell.

People like this usually take on the burdens of life too seriously and as a result often become sad and depressed or withdraw into their own shell.

If at all inclined to be very religious, they generally go to extremes and become fanatical in any Church they may adopt.

If they feel inclined to be very religious, they usually go to extremes and become fanatical about whatever church they choose.

Mysticism and occultism of all kinds appeal very strongly to their inner nature, but here again they are also inclined to go to extremes.

Mysticism and all forms of occultism strongly attract their inner nature, but once again, they tend to take it to extremes.

They almost worship clever, intellectual people, and are deep thinkers in all matters that interest them, but they cannot brook interference in their views from others.

They nearly idolize smart, intellectual people and are deep thinkers about everything that interests them, but they can't stand anyone challenging their opinions.

They are often found holding positions of great responsibility, but in all matters fatalism seems to play a strange rôle in their life. They seem chosen to be the instrument or mouthpiece of Destiny, often hurling thousands to destruction in what they believe is their duty. If called upon to make a sacrifice of their own flesh and kin they will be the first to plunge the knife into the heart of their dearest.[Pg 156]

They often hold positions of significant responsibility, but in all aspects, a strange sense of fatalism seems to shape their lives. They appear to be chosen as the instruments or representatives of Destiny, frequently causing thousands to meet their doom in what they see as their duty. If asked to make a sacrifice of their own family and loved ones, they will be the first to plunge the knife into the heart of their closest.[Pg 156]

Nearly all people born in this period are strange, strong characters, equally feared, loved, and hated.

Nearly everyone born during this time is unusual, strong-willed, and is both feared and loved, as well as hated.

HEALTH

The chief tendencies towards illness with persons born in this period are towards rheumatism, gout, pains and swellings in the feet and legs, also accidents to the feet, knees, and limbs, trouble with the liver and kidneys, ruptures, and disease of the teeth and ears.

The main health issues for people born during this time include rheumatism, gout, pain and swelling in the feet and legs, as well as injuries to the feet, knees, and limbs. They may also experience liver and kidney problems, hernias, and diseases related to the teeth and ears.

THE MOUNT OF SATURN (NEGATIVE)

The Mount of Saturn may be considered negative or mental when the person is found born between the dates of January 21st and February 18th, and also for the seven days following.

The Mount of Saturn can be seen as negative or mental when someone is born between January 21st and February 18th, as well as during the seven days after that.

These people are like the preceding type in almost all things, except that the same things appear to affect them more mentally than physically.

These people are similar to the previous type in almost every way, except that the same things seem to impact them more mentally than physically.

They also feel lonely in life, but more mentally than the former type—they seem to feel less companionship in their ideas and thoughts, whereas the former feel it more in their lives and careers.

They also feel lonely in life, but more in their minds than the first type—they seem to feel less connection in their ideas and thoughts, while the first type feels it more in their lives and careers.

These latter types are more sensitive and very easily wounded in their feelings.

These types are more sensitive and can get hurt easily.

They read character instinctively and seem to "see through" people too easily to be really happy. They bitterly resent being taken in or deceived, and when they think they have been, they astonish people by the bitterness of their resentment.

They read people's character instinctively and seem to "see through" others too easily to be truly happy. They deeply resent being fooled or misled, and when they believe they’ve been, they shock others with the intensity of their bitterness.

They make loyal, true friends, if their feelings are once aroused, and they will undergo any sacrifice for the sake of a friend, but they will stop at nothing to[Pg 157] avenge an injury if they think they have been deceived.

They become loyal, true friends once their feelings are stirred, and they'll make any sacrifice for a friend, but they won't hesitate to[Pg 157] take revenge if they believe they've been wronged.

They are usually very active for the public good, and they give a good deal of their time and money to doing good, but in their own way. Like the positive type of Saturn they have very decided views of their own about religion and especially the regular observances and ceremonials of Church life.

They are typically very engaged in serving the community and dedicate a significant amount of their time and money to charitable efforts, but they do it in their own way. Like the more optimistic side of Saturn, they have strong opinions about religion, particularly regarding the regular practices and ceremonies of church life.

They are very different from the previous type in that they usually take a keen interest in public meetings and large gatherings of people. They love theatres, concerts, and places of amusement, and yet always if they told the truth, they feel alone in life.

They are quite different from the previous type because they often have a strong interest in public meetings and large gatherings. They enjoy theaters, concerts, and entertainment venues, but if they're honest, they still feel alone in life.

They have a quiet controlling power with their eyes, and although highly nervous people themselves, yet they have the greatest control over excitable and nervous patients and also over the insane. It is a strange fact that in the run of their careers they seem fated to be brought into contact with such cases.

They have a calm but commanding presence in their gaze, and even though they're often quite anxious themselves, they manage to exert a strong influence over excitable and nervous patients, as well as those who are mentally ill. It’s interesting that throughout their careers, they seem destined to encounter these kinds of cases.

HEALTH

These people suffer most from the nerves of the stomach and the digestive organs, and ordinary remedies seem to fail entirely to relieve them.

These people mostly suffer from stomach and digestive issues, and regular treatments don’t seem to help them at all.

They have as a rule poor circulation of the blood, cold feet and hands, very delicate teeth, and suffer much from accidents and hurts to the feet, ankles and limbs.

They usually have poor blood circulation, cold feet and hands, very delicate teeth, and often experience a lot of accidents and injuries to their feet, ankles, and limbs.

They seldom feel strong in health and yet they have enormous power of resistance, and when a call is made on their will power, they usually astonish every one by what they can stand, especially if they in any way think that their duty or principles are involved or at stake.[Pg 158]

They rarely feel healthy but have an incredible ability to endure, and when their willpower is tested, they often surprise everyone with what they can tolerate, especially if they believe that their duty or principles are on the line.[Pg 158]


CHAPTER IX

THE MOUNT OF THE SUN AND ITS MEANING

The Mount of the Sun is found under the base of the third finger. To this Mount the Greeks also gave the name of Mount of Apollo (Plate VI., Part II.).

The Mount of the Sun is located beneath the base of the third finger. The Greeks also referred to this Mount as the Mount of Apollo (Plate VI., Part II.).

When large or well developed it indicates glory, publicity, a desire to shine before one's fellows. It is always considered a good Mount to have large.

When it's large or well-developed, it signifies glory, attention, and a wish to stand out among peers. It's generally seen as a positive attribute to have a large one.

It also indicates enthusiasm for the beautiful in all things, whether one follows an artistic calling or not. People with this Mount large, even if they have success in practical life, build beautiful houses or have artistic surroundings of some sort. They also have an expansive temperament, are generous and luxurious in all their tastes. They are bright and sunny by nature and have a forceful, happy, lucky personality.

It also shows a love for beauty in everything, whether someone pursues an artistic career or not. People with this characteristic tend to create beautiful homes or have artistic environments, even if they are successful in practical matters. They are usually generous and enjoy luxury in all their preferences. They have a cheerful and bright personality, exuding a strong, happy, and fortunate vibe.

This Mount may be considered Positive when the subject is found to be born between the dates of July 21st and August 20th, and generally until the 28th of this month, which portion of the Zodiac is called the "House of the Sun."

This Mount can be seen as Positive when a person is born between July 21st and August 20th, and generally until the 28th of this month, which is known as the "House of the Sun."

These people represent what may be called the heart force of the human race, and as a rule are generous and sympathetic even to an extreme.

These individuals embody what could be described as the core strength of humanity, and typically, they are incredibly generous and empathetic, sometimes to a fault.

They have great force of character and personality,[Pg 159] and even when constrained by circumstances to exist in the lower walks of life, they play, even there, a rôle distinct from their fellows, and their clean-cut, well-marked personality is sure to make itself manifest.

They have strong character and personality,[Pg 159] and even when forced by circumstances to live in lower socio-economic conditions, they still stand out from those around them, and their clear and defined personality will inevitably show through.

At heart they are really most sympathetic, though they often seem to hide this quality on account of their strong sense of trying to force people to do what is right towards others.

At their core, they are genuinely quite compassionate, even though they often appear to conceal this trait due to their strong desire to compel others to treat people well.

They have no mercy for "weaklings" or evaders of the truth, and in brutal frankness they will even denounce their own children should they find them falling into evil ways.

They have no pity for "weaklings" or anyone who avoids the truth, and with harsh honesty, they'll even condemn their own kids if they see them heading down the wrong path.

They display the greatest loyalty if any friend of theirs is attacked, especially if in an underhand way. They love intensely and they hate intensely. Theirs is no middle path, for they must be either at one extreme or the other.

They show the strongest loyalty when any of their friends is attacked, especially if it's done sneakily. They love deeply and they hate deeply. They don't have a middle ground; they are either at one extreme or the other.

Although truthful and naturally honest they often get terribly deceived, and the danger is with such people that towards the sunset of their lives, the glorious Sun that has shone, as it were, through them gets darkened by the deceit and treachery of others and sets in clouds, or gets hidden before the ending of life's pathway comes to view.

Although they are genuinely honest and truthful, they often end up being greatly deceived. The risk for such individuals is that, as they reach the later stages of their lives, the brilliant light that has shone through them gets obscured by the lies and betrayal of others, fading behind clouds or disappearing before the end of life's journey comes into sight.

Many of these people who have cheered others, who have brought their grand sunshine of good into the hearts of others, cannot cheer themselves when the twilight comes, and so they often fall victims to gloom and melancholy, and many commit suicide.

Many of these people who have uplifted others, who have brought their bright light of positivity into the hearts of those around them, find it hard to lift their own spirits when the darkness comes. As a result, they often fall into feelings of sadness and depression, and many end up taking their own lives.

Among other marked characteristics these people are extremely proud and would sooner die than ask favours from others. They are extremely easily wounded through their pride and are unusually sensitive.[Pg 160]

Among other noticeable traits, these people are very proud and would rather die than ask for help from others. They can be easily hurt by their pride and are quite sensitive.[Pg 160]

Impetuous and hot-tempered, they make many enemies, and when engaged in public life, which they are usually well fitted for, they often find themselves bitterly attacked in the most unscrupulous manner.

Impetuous and hot-tempered, they make many enemies, and when involved in public life, which they are usually well suited for, they often face harsh and unscrupulous attacks.

HEALTH

Those born in the dates I have given, or who have the Mount of the Sun large, are most inclined to suffer with pains, palpitations, and trouble of the heart, head, and ears; with inflammation of the eyes, kidneys, and swellings and injuries to the feet.

Those born on the dates I've mentioned, or who have a prominent Mount of the Sun, are more likely to experience pain, palpitations, and issues with their heart, head, and ears; as well as inflammation of the eyes, kidneys, and swelling or injuries to the feet.

MOUNT OF THE SUN (NEGATIVE)

This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is found born between January 21st and February 18th, and for the seven days following.

This Mount can be seen as Negative when a person is born between January 21 and February 18, and during the seven days after.

In this case they are far more successful when managing for others than for themselves.

In this situation, they are much more effective at managing for others than they are at managing for themselves.

They are usually found most active in their plans towards the relief of all distress and for what they believe to be the public good.

They are typically seen as most engaged in their efforts to alleviate all suffering and for what they think is the common good.

They are also often as a class found in governmental positions, or as leaders of some party or section of public opinion. Usually they take the part of the "under dog," and cause themselves to be greatly abused and disliked by the richer and more powerful classes.

They are also often found in government positions or as leaders of certain parties or sections of public opinion. Typically, they support the "underdog" and end up being heavily criticized and disliked by the wealthier and more powerful classes.

They seldom attract wealth as do those of the Positive type, who are usually lucky in money, and when they do they are inclined to impoverish themselves in their efforts to help those around them, or in the execution of their philanthropic plans for the good of the poorer classes.[Pg 161]

They rarely draw wealth like those with a Positive mindset, who tend to have good luck with money. When they do come into money, they often end up spending it on helping those around them or on their charitable efforts for the less fortunate.[Pg 161]

In strange apparent contradiction to this, these people are usually excellent in business and in their financial plans, but again it is more for others than for themselves. Many of them make fortunes for others and keep the merest pittance for their own homes.

In a strange contradiction to this, these people are usually great in business and in their financial planning, but it’s often more for others than for themselves. Many of them build fortunes for others and keep just a tiny amount for their own households.

As a rule, they find great pleasure in public ceremonies, and meetings of all kinds. They love theatres and all places where large numbers of people congregate, and when wound up to the occasion they can display great eloquence, power of argument, and influence in debates. They rarely hold the positions they win for the run of their careers, they seem to play the rôle of the moment, and when that is passed they just as quickly retire into obscurity or into a quiet private life, and often end their days in the most unusual or unheard-of places.

Typically, they take great pleasure in public events and gatherings of all sorts. They enjoy theaters and any venues where crowds gather, and when motivated by the situation, they can demonstrate remarkable eloquence, strong arguments, and influence in discussions. They seldom keep the positions they attain for long; they seem to play the role of the moment, and once it’s over, they swiftly fade into obscurity or lead a quiet private life, often winding up in the most unexpected or unfamiliar places.

Quite the reverse of the Positive type, these people seldom if ever commit suicide; on the contrary, they can endure any kind of martyrdom or suffering. They are buoyed up with the feeling they have done their duty to their fellow beings, and this feeling seems to sustain them against all disappointments, or losses or attacks on their name.

In contrast to the Positive type, these individuals rarely, if ever, take their own lives; instead, they can withstand all sorts of martyrdom or suffering. They are uplifted by the belief that they’ve fulfilled their obligations to others, and this sense of duty appears to keep them strong in the face of disappointments, losses, or attacks on their reputation.

HEALTH

These children of the Negative period of the Sun suffer mostly with the stomach and internal organs, also with poor circulation of blood, loss of natural heat, and with liver and kidney complaints.

These children of the Negative period of the Sun mostly struggle with stomach issues and problems with their internal organs, as well as poor blood circulation, a loss of natural warmth, and issues with their liver and kidneys.

They are also prone to have accidents to their bones, especially to limbs, knees, and ankles.

They are also likely to have accidents that injure their bones, particularly in their limbs, knees, and ankles.

Very dry climates and plenty of sunlight is their greatest safeguard against all their maladies.[Pg 162]

Very dry climates and lots of sunlight are their best protection against all their illnesses.[Pg 162]


CHAPTER X

THE MOUNT OF MERCURY AND ITS MEANING

The Mount of Mercury is found under the base of the fourth finger (Plate VI., Part II.). On a good hand it is a favourable Mount to have, but on a hand shewing evil tendencies, especially mental, it increases the bad indications.

The Mount of Mercury is located at the base of the fourth finger (Plate VI., Part II.). In a good hand, it's a positive Mount to have, but in a hand showing negative tendencies, especially mental ones, it amplifies the bad indications.

It seems to relate more to the mind than anything else. It gives quickness of brain, wit, thought, eloquence. It also relates to adaptability in science and commerce, but if evilly afflicted, it denotes mental excitability, nervousness, lack of concentration, trickiness in business, and everything that is unreliable in character.

It seems to connect more with the mind than anything else. It provides mental agility, cleverness, quick thinking, and eloquence. It also pertains to adaptability in science and business, but if negatively affected, it indicates mental restlessness, anxiety, a lack of focus, dishonesty in business, and everything that is unreliable in character.

This Mount should always be considered with the kind of Line of Head found on the hand.

This Mount should always be viewed in relation to the type of Line of Head present on the hand.

With a Line of Head long and well marked, it increases all the promise of mental aptitude and success, but with a weak, badly marked, or irregular Head Line, it augments all its weak or bad indications.

With a long, well-defined Head Line, it boosts all signs of intelligence and success, but with a weak, poorly defined, or uneven Head Line, it amplifies all its negative or weak signals.

THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (POSITIVE)

This Mount can be considered positive when the subject is found to be born between the dates of May 21st and June 20th, and until the 27th of that month, but during the last seven days its influence is considered dying out and not so strong.[Pg 163]

This Mount can be seen as positive when the person is born between May 21st and June 20th, and until the 27th of that month. However, during the last seven days, its influence is considered to be fading and not as strong.[Pg 163]

People born in this period are represented in the Zodiac by the symbolism of the twins. It is a curious fact that all persons born in this part of the year are singularly dual in character and temperament. One side of their nature may, in fact, be described as perpetually pulling against the other, and although nearly always possessed with unusual intelligence, they often spoil their lives by lack of continuity in their plans and in their purpose.

People born during this time are represented in the Zodiac by twins. It’s interesting that everyone born this time of year tends to have a dual nature and temperament. One part of their personality often conflicts with the other, and while they usually have exceptional intelligence, they often derail their lives by not being consistent with their plans and goals.

They seldom seem to have a fixed idea of what they really want. They change their plans or their occupations at a moment's notice, and unless they chance to be very happily married, they are just as uncertain in marriage.

They rarely seem to have a clear idea of what they really want. They change their plans or jobs at the drop of a hat, and unless they happen to be very happily married, they are just as unpredictable in marriage.

They are the most difficult of all classes to understand. In temperament they are hot and cold in the same moment, they may love passionately with one side of their nature and just as quickly dislike with the other.

They are the hardest of all groups to understand. In temperament, they can be warm and cold at the same time; they might love intensely with one part of themselves and just as quickly feel dislike with another.

They are very critical, and especially notice small faults or mannerisms in others, and they can express their views with a sarcasm that is as cutting as it is clever.

They are very critical and particularly keen on spotting small flaws or quirks in others, and they can share their opinions with a sarcasm that is as sharp as it is witty.

In all business dealings or affairs where a subtle, keen mentality is useful, they can out-distance all rivals, provided they are sufficiently interested to enter into the competition.

In all business dealings or situations where a sharp and perceptive mindset is valuable, they can surpass all competitors, as long as they are motivated enough to engage in the competition.

They are excellent in diplomacy and are gifted talkers, but they usually leave their listeners at the end of their conversation no wiser than they were at the beginning.

They excel in diplomacy and are great at talking, but they often leave their listeners no smarter by the end of the conversation than they were at the start.

If taken as they are and with their moods, they are the most delightful people imaginable, but one must never expect them to be the same to-day that they were yesterday.[Pg 164]

If you take them as they are and consider their moods, they are the most delightful people you can imagine, but you should never expect them to be the same today as they were yesterday.[Pg 164]

They believe that they are the most truthful persons in the world, and so they may be at the moment they are telling the story, but to them moments seem entire lives, and so in a day or a week the same story may have a totally different colouring.

They think they are the most truthful people in the world, and they might be at the moment they’re sharing the story, but to them, moments feel like whole lives. So, in a day or a week, the same story can take on a completely different tone.

None of these people will probably admit this to be true of his character, but a little study will convince anyone that it is a fairly accurate description of this subject's chief characteristics.

None of these people will likely confess that this is true about his character, but a little examination will persuade anyone that it is a pretty accurate depiction of this person's main traits.

Mental work, especially the class of mental work that requires quickness of wit and change, appeals to them more than any other. They make clever actors, barristers, and a certain class of public speakers, also diplomatists, stock brokers, company promoters, or inventors of new methods in business. In all careers that require keenness of brain, they can attain success, provided they have developed a sufficient amount of will power and continuity of purpose to stick long enough to any one thing.

Mental work, particularly the type that demands quick thinking and adaptability, interests them more than anything else. They excel as actors, lawyers, and certain types of public speakers, as well as diplomats, stockbrokers, company promoters, or inventors of new business strategies. In any field that requires sharp intellect, they can succeed, as long as they have developed enough willpower and perseverance to stick with something long enough.

HEALTH

Everything that can affect the nerves and the nervous system especially, afflicts these people.

Everything that can impact the nerves and the nervous system, in particular, troubles these individuals.

Indigestion caused by nervous worry or anxiety, catalepsy, paralysis, afflictions of the tongue, stammering, insomnia, vivid dreams; to all such things they are specially liable. They are also inclined towards delicacy of the throat and bronchial tubes, and particularly to trouble with the nose and eyes.

Indigestion from nervous worry or anxiety, episodes of catalepsy, paralysis, issues with the tongue, stuttering, insomnia, and intense dreams; they are especially prone to all these things. They also tend to have sensitivity in the throat and bronchial tubes, and particularly difficulties with the nose and eyes.

THE MOUNT OF MERCURY (NEGATIVE)

This Mount may be considered negative when the persons are born between August 21st and September[Pg 165] 20th, and until the 27th, but these last seven days of this period are not so marked, but take more from the characteristics of the incoming sign.

This Mount can be seen as negative for those born between August 21st and September [Pg 165] 20th, and until the 27th. However, the last seven days of this period are less significant and are influenced more by the traits of the upcoming sign.

People belonging to this negative type of the Mount of Mercury have all the good points of the positive class, and even some added in their favour. For example, they stick longer and with more continuity to whatever study or career they adopt. They have hardly the quickness or the brilliancy of the first type, but they have a more solid, plodding course of action, and as a general rule they make more out of their lives.

People who fit this negative type of the Mount of Mercury have all the positive traits of the positive class, and even a few more advantages. For instance, they tend to remain committed for longer and with greater consistency to whichever study or career they choose. They may lack the quickness or brilliance of the first type, but they have a steadier, more persistent approach, and generally, they achieve more in their lives.

They are also more materialistic and practical in their views of life, but they analyse and reason everything from their own way of thinking outwards towards others. If they see a thing is right, it is right to them, and for this reason they are often found doing exactly the opposite from what one would expect.

They are also more focused on material things and practical in how they view life, but they assess and reason everything from their own perspective and then extend that to others. If they believe something is right, then to them, it is right. Because of this, they often end up doing the exact opposite of what you would expect.

Women born in this period are especially curious puzzles. They are either extremely virtuous or the direct opposite, either extremely truthful and conventional or the reverse; but whether good or bad, they are all a law unto themselves, and in all things they usually think of themselves first.

Women born during this time are particularly intriguing. They tend to be either very virtuous or completely the opposite, either very truthful and conventional or not at all; but whether they are good or bad, they all follow their own rules, and in everything, they typically think of themselves first.

People born in this period often abandon their husbands or their children just because they think they ought to do so. They also are liable to change their religious views half way through life, or from the most conventional suddenly become the reverse. In the same way women who have commenced their career by leading unconventional lives, may just as suddenly become religious and enter some extremely severe order or community.

People born during this time often leave their husbands or children simply because they feel they should. They are also prone to change their religious beliefs halfway through life or to flip from being very conventional to completely opposite. Similarly, women who start their careers by living unconventional lives may suddenly become religious and join a very strict order or community.

Again, as in the positive type, it is the Line of Head[Pg 166] that must be carefully considered if one should endeavour to form an estimate of what they will eventually become.

Again, just like in the positive type, it's the Line of Head[Pg 166] that needs to be closely examined if someone wants to try to predict what they will ultimately become.

If it be clear and straight, their best qualities will, as a rule, come to their rescue; but if weak or poorly marked, it is more than likely, especially with this class, that the evil side of the nature will in the end predominate.

If it's clear and straightforward, their best qualities will usually save them; but if it's weak or poorly defined, it's more likely, especially with this group, that their negative traits will ultimately take over.

HEALTH

These people are more open to mental suggestion as far as health is concerned than any other class.

These people are more receptive to mental suggestions regarding health than any other group.

If they think they are ill it is quite sufficient that they are so, and they can become cured in exactly the same manner.

If they believe they're sick, that's enough for them to actually be sick, and they can get better in exactly the same way.

In reality they have excellent constitutions, except when they are ruined by taking drugs and medicines.

In reality, they have great health, except when it's damaged by drugs and medications.

As they always imagine that they have something the matter, they are invariably the willing prey of quack doctors and every new cure that is advertised.

As they constantly believe there’s something wrong with them, they are always easy targets for fake doctors and every new treatment that gets advertised.

They can hardly pass a chemist's shop without buying something, and if they sit next to a doctor at a dinner table, they are certain to walk off with some prescription.

They can barely walk by a pharmacy without picking up something, and if they sit next to a doctor at dinner, they're sure to leave with a prescription.

Their greatest fault is that they will persist in talking to everyone of their supposed ailments or afflictions, for the slightest ache, pain, or anything that concerns them, has the most exaggerated importance in their mind.

Their biggest flaw is that they keep talking to everyone about their imagined ailments or struggles. Even the smallest ache, pain, or anything that bothers them takes on excessive importance in their minds.

On the contrary, Nature can do more for these people than for any other class of humanity. Peace of mind, a country life, and plenty of fresh air will banish all their ills and ailments into oblivion.[Pg 167]

On the other hand, Nature can do more for these people than for any other group of humanity. A peaceful mind, rural living, and lots of fresh air will drive all their troubles and illnesses away.[Pg 167]

But, if badly mated, or living in unhappy surroundings, their health quickly breaks up, and if they cannot make a change into happier conditions, then no medicine in all the world can help them.[Pg 168]

But if they are poorly matched or live in unhappy environments, their health quickly deteriorates, and if they can't change to better conditions, then no medicine in the world can save them.[Pg 168]


CHAPTER XI

THE MOUNT OF THE MOON AND ITS MEANING

The Mount of the Moon, or as it is also called the Mount of Luna, is found on the base of the hand under the end of the Line of Head (Plate VI., Part II.).

The Mount of the Moon, also known as the Mount of Luna, is located at the base of the hand just below the end of the Line of Head (Plate VI., Part II.).

This Mount relates to everything that has to do with the imaginative faculties, the emotional artistic temperament, romance, ideality, poetry, change of scenery, travel, and such like.

This Mount connects to everything related to imagination, emotional artistic nature, romance, idealism, poetry, changes in surroundings, travel, and similar themes.

This Mount may be considered positive when it looks high or well-developed, and also when the subject is found to be born between the dates of June 21st and July 20th, and until July 27th.

This Mount can be seen as positive when it's prominent or well-defined, and also when the person is born between June 21 and July 20, up until July 27.

People who belong to this positive class are gifted with strong imagination which tinges everything they do or say. They are intensely romantic, but idealistic in their desires, and have not that passionate or sensual nature that is given by the Mount of Venus on the opposite side of the palm.

People in this positive group have a vivid imagination that colors everything they do or say. They are deeply romantic but have idealistic desires and lack the passionate or sensual nature associated with the Mount of Venus on the opposite side of the palm.

As a rule they have the inventive faculties well developed, and succeed in inventions and in all new ideas in whatever careers they may have entered.

As a rule, they have well-developed creative abilities and excel in innovations and new ideas, no matter what careers they have pursued.

Even business people born in this period are remarkable for their originality, and the inventive manner in which they will tackle the most practical affair.[Pg 169]

Even business people born in this time are notable for their originality and the creative ways they approach the most practical matters.[Pg 169]

They are, however, inclined to speculate or gamble even with their chances, also in stocks, business or, in fact, anything in which they are engaged.

They, however, tend to speculate or take risks with their chances, whether it's in stocks, business, or really anything they're involved in.

Although their imagination is large, they often achieve great success and make money in business. Some great financiers and heads of large organisations have been born in this period and have also had the Mount of Luna very highly developed on their hands.

Although their imagination is vast, they often find great success and make money in business. Some prominent financiers and leaders of major organizations have been born during this time and have also had the Mount of Luna highly developed on their hands.

It has been said "that what one sees in one's dreams one shall gain in reality," but the fact remains that imaginative people have been found among the most successful of all classes. Imagination may be another name for Inspiration.

It has been said "that what one sees in one's dreams one shall gain in reality," but the truth is that creative people are often among the most successful of all groups. Imagination might just be another way to describe Inspiration.

People born in this period are seldom hide-bound by any rule of thumb or set convention. They love what is new in everything, and perhaps for this reason they love travel and change, and generally see the greater part of this planet before they voyage over the last river of all.

People born during this time aren't usually constrained by traditional rules or established norms. They embrace newness in everything, and maybe that's why they enjoy travel and change, often exploring much of the world before they embark on their final journey.

Change in every way affects their careers as it also does their lives. Even the successful members of this period have more ups and downs than almost any other class.

Change in every way impacts their careers just as it does their lives. Even the most successful members of this generation experience more highs and lows than almost any other group.

They rarely, however, give in to the blows of Fate. Their imagination probably helps them through, and they seldom remain down or down-hearted for long.

They rarely give in to the blows of fate. Their imagination likely helps them get through it, and they often don't stay down or feeling sorry for themselves for long.

Inventors, a large number of artists, musicians, and composers are found among people of this type, but almost without exception they have a love of mystic and occult things, and their dreams and visions are tangible and clear.

Inventors, many artists, musicians, and composers are found among these people, but almost without exception they have a fascination with mysticism and the occult, and their dreams and visions are vivid and clear.

These Children of the Moon owe much to the influence of their planet that they are even more magnetic and successful when the Moon appears in the heavens.[Pg 170] Even their health appears to change and become better under her benign influence, and they should always be advised to commence their plans or operations when their planet is to be seen illuminating the skies.

These Children of the Moon are greatly influenced by their planet, making them even more charming and successful when the Moon is visible in the sky.[Pg 170] Even their health seems to improve under her favorable influence, and it's always best for them to start their plans or projects when their planet can be seen lighting up the skies.

That the Moon plays an important rôle in the affairs of this earth cannot for a moment be doubted. Recent discoveries are every day revealing more and more that her strange magnetic influence has a power almost beyond belief in its effect upon the growth of vegetables, and even inanimate things.

That the Moon plays an important role in the affairs of this Earth is undeniable. Daily discoveries are showing more and more that her unique magnetic influence has an almost unbelievable effect on the growth of plants and even non-living things.

There are other thinkers besides those interested in occult subjects who have noticed the effect of this planet on mundane things. If the Moon can affect vegetables, eggs, and the growth of chickens, as it is proved to do, how much more easily and wonderfully it must affect the grey matter of the human brain, which is the most subtle and mysterious essence of all.

There are other thinkers, aside from those focused on occult topics, who have recognized how this planet influences everyday life. If the Moon can impact plants, eggs, and chicken growth, as has been demonstrated, how much more profoundly and intriguingly must it affect the brain's grey matter, the most delicate and enigmatic substance of all.

People born in the period I have mentioned should be most careful of those with whom they associate, because they are extraordinarily sensitive to the magnetism of others.

People born during the period I've mentioned should be very careful about who they hang out with, because they're extremely sensitive to the energy of others.

They should, if possible, avoid marrying early in life unless they are absolutely sure they have met their affinity. These natures both change and develop rapidly, and they have a strong tendency to "grow away" from those with whom they associate in early life. It is the same with partners in business; they should be as much as possible "on their own" or, if partnerships are made, they should not be of a binding or restricting order, and provision should always be made for the partnership to be dissolved when it has become irksome.[Pg 171]

They should, if possible, avoid getting married young unless they are completely sure they’ve found their soulmate. People change and grow quickly, and there’s a strong chance they’ll drift apart from those they connect with early on. The same goes for business partners; they should try to be independent as much as possible, or if they do form partnerships, those arrangements shouldn’t be too strict or limiting, and there should always be a way to end the partnership if it becomes uncomfortable.[Pg 171]

HEALTH

These Children of the Moon are chiefly inclined towards all watery ailments and inflammatory diseases. In early life they are prone towards having water on the brain, gastric and dysentery attacks, and later in life, inflammation of the lungs and chest, pleurisy, and dropsy.

These Children of the Moon are mostly affected by all kinds of water-related illnesses and inflammatory diseases. When they’re young, they tend to have issues like water on the brain, stomach problems, and dysentery attacks. As they get older, they’re more likely to deal with lung inflammation, chest issues, pleurisy, and dropsy.

THE MOUNT OF THE MOON (NEGATIVE)

This Mount is considered negative when it appears very flat on the hand, and it may also be taken as negative when people are found to be born between the dates of January 21st and February 20th, and in a minor degree, until about February 27th.

This Mount is seen as negative when it looks very flat on the hand, and it can also be considered negative for people born between January 21st and February 20th, and to a lesser extent, until around February 27th.

People born between these dates have good mental powers, but their imaginative faculties are seldom as much in evidence as is so strongly the case with the positive period.

People born between these dates have strong mental abilities, but their imaginative skills are rarely as prominent as they are during the positive period.

These persons, on the contrary, are good and quiet reasoners-out of problems and matters relating to the organisation of business, and are also excellent in all forms of government work. They make splendid heads of departments and rise to any responsibility very quickly and easily.

These individuals, on the other hand, are thoughtful and calm problem solvers when it comes to business organization and are also great at handling all types of government work. They make outstanding department heads and quickly and easily take on any responsibilities.

They are high-minded and have very decided views on love, duty, and social life. They make great efforts to do good to others, but as a rule their best work is done towards helping the masses more than individuals.

They are principled and have strong opinions about love, duty, and social life. They make significant efforts to help others, but generally, their best work is focused on benefiting the community rather than individuals.

They are extremely kind-hearted and love to give a helping hand when they can, but at the same time they have an unfortunate knack of making many bitter enemies, and when holding government positions they are most bitterly attacked by the opposition press.[Pg 172] Their work seldom receives its proper recognition and reward until they have passed from their sphere of influence, or have left this world of mistrust and ingratitude.

They are incredibly kind and enjoy lending a hand whenever they can, but at the same time, they have a frustrating tendency to make a lot of bitter enemies. When they hold government positions, they face harsh criticism from the opposing press.[Pg 172] Their efforts rarely get the recognition and appreciation they deserve until they have moved on from their position or have left this world full of mistrust and ingratitude.

They generally make excellent speakers, but more from "plain speaking," in a particular way of their own.

They usually make great speakers, but more due to their straightforward way of expressing themselves.

As a rule they espouse the unpopular cause and take the part of the under dog in the fight.

Usually, they support the unpopular cause and side with the underdog in the struggle.

They make devoted and loyal friends once their friendship is aroused, but at the same time they are extremely sensitive and easily wounded by those they care for.

They become dedicated and loyal friends once their friendship is sparked, but at the same time, they are very sensitive and can be easily hurt by those they care about.

They are strongly inclined to be religious and generally bring their religious views into all they do. They are in danger of becoming too fanatical, and when opposed, they become extremely obstinate, dogmatic, and hard to manage.

They tend to be very religious and usually incorporate their beliefs into everything they do. They risk becoming overly fanatical, and when challenged, they can become incredibly stubborn, dogmatic, and difficult to handle.

Heavy responsibility for others suits them best of all, especially if such responsibility lies in the form of government work, or in some position of management.

Heavy responsibility for others is what they excel at the most, particularly when that responsibility involves government work or a management position.

HEALTH

These people usually worry themselves into bad health. They overwork themselves and bring on nervous breakdowns, palpitation and weakness of the heart, and often paralysis. They suffer with the nerves of the stomach, acidity of the blood, rheumatism, liver complaints, and gout. They are particularly liable to meet with accidents to the feet, ankles, and limbs.

These people often stress themselves into poor health. They overwork themselves and end up with nervous breakdowns, heart palpitations, and weakness, and often face paralysis. They struggle with stomach nerves, blood acidity, rheumatism, liver issues, and gout. They're especially prone to accidents involving their feet, ankles, and limbs.

They should be very guarded when travelling by water, for they seldom get through life without sooner or later experiencing grave danger of drowning.[Pg 173]

They should be very cautious when traveling by water, as they rarely go through life without eventually facing a serious risk of drowning.[Pg 173]


CHAPTER XII

THE MOUNT OF VENUS AND ITS MEANING

The portion of the palm under the base of the Thumb and inside the Line of Life is called the Mount of Venus (Plate VI., Part II.).

The area of the palm under the base of the thumb and inside the Line of Life is known as the Mount of Venus (Plate VI., Part II.).

When well-formed and not too large, it denotes a desire for love and companionship, the desire to please, worship of beauty in every form, the artistic and emotional temperament, and it is usually very prominent in the hands of all artists, singers, and musicians.

When well-formed and not too large, it signifies a longing for love and companionship, a wish to please, an appreciation for beauty in all its forms, and an artistic and emotional temperament. This trait is often very noticeable in the hands of artists, singers, and musicians.

This Mount, the science of Physiology teaches, covers one of the most important blood vessels in the palm, viz., the "Great Palmer Arch." If this loop or arch is large, it indicates a plentiful supply of blood and strong active circulation; consequently, the health is more robust. It is found that persons possessing this Mount well developed, being in active strong health, are naturally more full of passion than those individuals in poor health, and who, in consequence, have this portion of the hand either flat or poorly developed. Hence, when this Mount is large it has been considered to show passion and larger sensuality than when flat, flabby, or non-developed.

This Mount, as the science of Physiology teaches, covers one of the most important blood vessels in the palm, known as the "Great Palmer Arch." If this loop or arch is large, it indicates a good blood supply and strong circulation; therefore, the health is generally better. It's found that people with a well-developed Mount, who are in strong, active health, tend to be more passionate than those who are not in good health and have this part of the hand either flat or poorly developed. Thus, when this Mount is prominent, it is seen as a sign of passion and greater sensuality compared to when it is flat, weak, or underdeveloped.

This Mount is therefore called Positive when high or large, and Negative when small or flat.[Pg 174]

This mountain is called Positive when it's tall or big, and Negative when it's small or flat.[Pg 174]

With the rest of the hand normal, this Mount well shaped is an excellent sign to have, as it denotes magnetism and attraction of one sex to the other, but if found together with vicious or abnormal signs in the hand, it increases those tendencies.

With the rest of the hand normal, this well-shaped Mount is a great sign to have, as it indicates magnetism and attraction between the sexes. However, if it appears alongside negative or unusual signs in the hand, it amplifies those tendencies.

When considered with the birth date, as alluded to in the former chapters, it helps to throw considerable light on characteristics that might otherwise be overlooked.

When you consider it alongside the birth date, as mentioned in the previous chapters, it really helps shed light on traits that might otherwise be missed.

The student may consider it Positive when the subject is born between April 20th and May 20th, and in a minor way until May 27th, the chief characteristics of this period being as follows:

The student might see it as Positive when the subject is born between April 20th and May 20th, and to a lesser extent until May 27th, with the main characteristics of this period being as follows:

These persons have a curious dominating power over others, and are found rather inclined to be too dogmatic in their opinions, and also often too unyielding and tyrannical. They are considered stiff-necked and obstinate, but the strange thing is that when they love they become the most abject slaves of all to the object of their devotion, and they will consider no sacrifice too great for that one being who holds or attracts their affection.

These people have a strange ability to dominate others, and they often come off as too rigid in their opinions, as well as stubborn and harsh. They are seen as inflexible and obstinate, but the odd thing is that when they love, they become completely devoted to the person they care about, willing to make any sacrifice for the one who has captured their heart.

They are hospitable and generous, and especially love to entertain their friends. They make wonderfully good hosts, have great taste about food, and love to give excellent dinners.

They are welcoming and generous, and especially enjoy having their friends over. They are fantastic hosts, have great taste in food, and love to serve amazing dinners.

They dress with great taste, and are generally considered richer than they really are, and they can make a good show on very little.

They dress with a lot of style and are often seen as wealthier than they actually are, and they can put on a great display with very little.

They are impulsive in their likes and dislikes, rather too frank and outspoken, quick in temper, and when their blood is up they have no restraint on what they say.

They are impulsive about what they like and dislike, a bit too honest and direct, quick to anger, and when they're fired up, they don't hold back on what they say.

Their passion or temper is, however, quickly over,[Pg 175] and when the storm is passed they are most regretful for the wounds their temper may have caused.

Their passion or anger is, however, quickly over,[Pg 175] and when the storm has passed they feel very sorry for the hurt their temper may have caused.

These types are most easily influenced by their surroundings, and become morbid and depressed when they are forced to live in gloomy and uncongenial conditions.

These types are most easily affected by their environment and become unhealthy and down when they have to live in dreary and uncomfortable situations.

Neither the man nor woman born in this period should marry early, for their first attempt is usually a mistake. They are so independent in character that, especially if they marry early and find their mistake, they lead unconventional lives and get severely criticised in consequence.

Neither the man nor woman born during this time should marry young, as their first marriage is often a mistake. They are so independent in nature that, especially if they marry early and realize their error, they tend to live unconventional lives and face heavy criticism as a result.

They are inclined to be very jealous when their affections are roused, especially if the peace of the home is in any way disturbed.

They tend to get really jealous when their feelings are stirred up, especially if anything disrupts the peace at home.

HEALTH

People born in this period have usually short or round-shaped nails which indicate a tendency to suffer with complaints of the throat and nose.[8] They also suffer, as a rule, with pains in the head and ears, swellings in the neck, and have a tendency towards tumours, appendicitis, and other internal troubles, chiefly relating to the intestines.

People born during this time typically have short or round-shaped nails, which suggest a likelihood of experiencing issues with their throat and nose.[8] They also generally have headaches and ear pain, swelling in the neck, and a tendency toward tumors, appendicitis, and other internal problems, mainly related to the intestines.

[8] See Chapter on Nails, page 136.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ See Chapter on Nails, page __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

THE MOUNT OF VENUS (NEGATIVE)

This Mount may be considered Negative when the subject is born between the dates of September 21st and October 20th, and in a minor way until October 27th, and with people born in this period it is seldom found so prominent. The fact is, that the affections these[Pg 176] subjects possess may be just as intense, but more mental than physical.

This Mount can be seen as Negative for those born between September 21st and October 20th, and to a lesser extent until October 27th. It's rarely very prominent in people born during this time. The reality is that the feelings these[Pg 176] individuals have can be just as strong, but they tend to be more mental than physical.

Their love is spiritual rather than sensual, and they crave more for soul companionship than for that of the physical senses.

Their love is more about a deep connection than physical attraction, and they long for a bond of the soul rather than just a connection of the senses.

Of course there are exceptions to all rules, but these exceptions can be easily seen by watching if the Mount of Venus is large with people born in this period.

Of course, there are exceptions to every rule, but you can easily spot these exceptions by noticing if the Mount of Venus is prominent in people born during this time.

All mental characteristics rule, however, very strongly. Those born in this latter period have keen intuition and a mental balance of all things not given to the other class. They have presentiments and psychic experiences, dreams, clairvoyance, and such like, which they often spoil by their reasoning faculties, and they endeavour to answer all problems through the medium of their mind or mental faculties.

All mental traits are very dominant. People born in this later period have sharp intuition and a mental clarity that others lack. They experience premonitions and psychic events, dreams, clairvoyance, and similar phenomena, but often ruin these insights with their reasoning skills. They try to solve all problems using their mind or mental abilities.

In love they are nearly always unhappy. They cannot "let themselves go," like the Positive Venus type. They hesitate and miss their opportunities whilst they think or reason, and so love goes by and often leaves them nothing but regret. They should be advised to act more on their first impressions and intuition, and take the opportunities that Fate throws in their way.

In love, they are almost always unhappy. They can’t “let themselves go,” like the confident Venus type. They hesitate and miss their chances while they think things through, and so love passes them by, often leaving nothing but regret. They should be encouraged to trust their first instincts and intuition and seize the opportunities that fate gives them.

They occupy themselves very much with all mental questions concerning their fellow beings. They are often found studying Law, but more with the desire of improving it for others than for their own personal advantage.

They are very engaged with all the issues concerning their fellow humans. They often study Law, but more out of a desire to improve it for others than for their own benefit.

They have a great desire for knowledge, and often spend their lives in studying abstruse subjects, but always weighing and balancing each point in the most conscientious manner. They make excellent doctors, judges, lawyers, but more as masters of some[Pg 177] particular branch than that of gaining worldly advantage.

They have a strong desire for knowledge and often spend their lives studying complex subjects while carefully considering each point. They make excellent doctors, judges, and lawyers, focusing more on mastering a specific area than on gaining material success.

HEALTH

The people born in this period are inclined to suffer from lack of physical strength, exhaustion of the nerves, depression of spirits, melancholia, intense feeling of loneliness, and such like. Also severe headaches, pains in the back, loins, and kidneys; just as in the case of those of the other period of this Venus sign they have a great tendency, especially the women, to suffer from internal ailments, and often undergo severe operations.[Pg 178]

People born during this time tend to experience a lack of physical strength, nerve exhaustion, low mood, feelings of sadness, and a deep sense of loneliness. They often suffer from severe headaches and pain in the back, lower back, and kidneys. Similar to those from the other period of this Venus sign, they are particularly prone, especially women, to internal issues and frequently need to undergo major surgeries.[Pg 178]


CHAPTER XIII

ADVICE TO THE STUDENT. THE BEST MEANS TO MAKE CASTS OR TAKE IMPRESSIONS OF THE HANDS

I would strongly advise students of this subject to make casts of hands in plaster of Paris, wax, or any other suitable material, in order to make a library or collection, both for their own private study, and also as a valuable record of their work.

I strongly recommend that students of this subject create casts of hands using plaster, wax, or any other suitable material. This will allow them to build a library or collection for their personal study and also serve as a valuable record of their work.

Before I read any hands professionally, I had some thousands of casts, impressions on paper, and photographs of hands in my possession, and I found that I derived the most valuable aid from being able to analyse and study their shapes and markings at my leisure.

Before I started reading hands professionally, I had thousands of casts, paper impressions, and photos of hands in my collection. I found that I gained the most valuable insight from analyzing and studying their shapes and markings at my own pace.

In making casts I would advise the very finest plaster of Paris to be used. When the plaster is worked up to the proper consistency, it is necessary to rub a fine oil into the hand before bringing it into contact with the plaster, as otherwise the hair may stick and so cause trouble and annoyance.

In making casts, I recommend using the highest quality plaster of Paris. Once the plaster is mixed to the right consistency, it's important to rub a light oil onto your hand before touching the plaster; otherwise, the hair could stick, leading to problems and frustration.

Dental wax heated in hot water and made very soft is also an excellent material to make moulds from, especially as it does not make a mess, and is very little trouble to employ.

Dental wax heated in hot water and softened is also a great material for making molds, especially since it doesn't create a mess and is easy to use.

The great disadvantage of making a collection of casts arises from the large space that such a collection[Pg 179] will eventually occupy. To avoid this the student can also make a library of impressions of hands on paper, and keep them marked and numbered in a series of albums or scrap-books that may easily be obtained at any stationer's.

The major downside of creating a collection of casts is the significant amount of space it will eventually take up. To avoid this, students can also create a library of hand impressions on paper, organizing them with labels and numbers in a series of albums or scrapbooks that can easily be found at any stationery store.

The best means of taking these impressions is to obtain a small gelatine roller used by printers for fine work, such as die stamping, a tube of printer's ink, and a small sheet of glass to roll the ink out until it covers the surface of the roller in an even way.

The best way to get these impressions is to use a small gelatin roller that printers use for fine work, like die stamping, a tube of printer's ink, and a small sheet of glass to spread the ink until it covers the roller's surface evenly.

The roller may then be passed over the surface of the palm, the hand pressed firmly down on a smooth sheet of white paper, and with a little practice, most excellent impressions can easily be obtained.

The roller can then be rolled over the palm's surface, with the hand pressed down firmly on a smooth sheet of white paper, and with some practice, you can easily get great impressions.

When the impression is dry it can be dated, numbered, and placed in an album for reference.

When the impression is dry, it can be dated, numbered, and stored in an album for reference.

In order to remove the black ink from the hand, powdered washing soap, well brushed into the hand with a nail brush, and a little hot water is all that will be found necessary.

To get the black ink off your hands, just use powdered laundry soap, scrub it into your hands with a nail brush, and add a bit of hot water. That's all you need.

These impressions taken with printer's ink are far better than those taken by smoking a sheet of paper by camphor, or by a candle, or any other means.

These prints made with printer's ink are much better than those made by using camphor on a sheet of paper, or by candlelight, or through any other method.

The best time for examining hands is during the day, first because the light is better and, above all, because the circulation of the blood does not redden the entire palm as it does at night, and the finer lines can consequently easily be detected.

The best time to examine hands is during the day, mainly because the light is better and, most importantly, the blood circulation doesn’t make the whole palm red like it does at night, allowing the finer lines to be easily seen.

As I described earlier in these pages, the right and left hands should be examined together to note what difference there may be in the shape and position of the lines, but the markings on the right hand are the only ones to be relied on.

As I mentioned earlier in this text, you should look at the right and left hands together to see any differences in the shape and position of the lines, but only the markings on the right hand should be trusted.

Lastly, do not be for ever on the lookout for faults[Pg 180] and failings in the subject whose hands you may be examining, remember no one is perfect, and that faults and failings may in the end be as stepping stones "by which we rise from our dead selves to higher things."

Lastly, don’t always be on the hunt for flaws and mistakes in the person you’re evaluating. Remember, no one is perfect, and those flaws and mistakes might ultimately serve as stepping stones "by which we rise from our dead selves to higher things."[Pg 180]

Transcriber's notes

Transcription notes

P(ix) d'Arpentigny corrected to D'Arpentigny
P10 dveloped corrected to developed.
P76 forshadows corected to foreshadows
P63 Removed extraneous comma.
P130 Period added at the end of a paragraph.
P132 Added "is called the Finger of" instead of " to clarify.
P135 Period added before a capital The.
P142 decribed corrected to described.
P158 Extra opening parenthesis removed.

P(ix) d'Arpentigny corrected to D'Arpentigny
P10 developed corrected to developed.
P76 foreshadows corrected to foreshadows
P63 Removed extra comma.
P130 Period added at the end of a paragraph.
P132 Added "is called the Finger of" instead of " to clarify.
P135 Period added before a capital The.
P142 described corrected to described.
P158 Extra opening parenthesis removed.




        
        
    
Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!